070 4665 01_4115B_Operators_Manual_Apr1984 01 4115B Operators Manual Apr1984

User Manual: Pdf 070-4665-01_4115B_Operators_Manual_Apr1984

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 261

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TE K

OPERATORS
MANUAL

Part No. 070-4665-01
Product Group 16

4115B/M4115B
COMPUTER DISPLAY
TERMINAL

TEK

OPERATORS
MANUAL

Part No. 070-4665-01
Product Group 16

4115B/M4115B
COMPUTER DISPLAY
TERMINAL

Please Check for
CHANGE INFORMATION
at the Rear of This Manual

First Printing AUG 1983
Revised APR 1984

It!ktronoo
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE

WARNING

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual,
may cause
interference to radio
communications. It has been tested to comply with the limits for
Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart J or Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against
such interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
interference in which case the users at thier own expense will be
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.

Copyright © 1983, 1984 by Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon.
Printed in the United States of America. All rights reserved.
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form
without permission of Tektronix, Inc.
This instrument, in whole or in part, may be protected by one or
more U.S. or foreign patents or patent applications. Information
provided upon request by Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton,
Oregon 97077.
TEKTRONIX is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.

MANUAL

RIEV~S~ON

SlAllJJS

PRODUCT: 41158 Computer Display Terminal and M41158 Computer Display Terminal
This manual supports the following versions of this product: Serial Numbers 8010100 and up.
Firmware Version 6.0 and up.
DESCRIPTION

REV DATE

AUG 1983

Original Issue.

JAN 1984

Revised to include information on M4115B Computer Display Terminal; part number rolled to 070-4665-01.

APR 1984

Revised: pages 1-6, 2-27, 3-9, 3-10, 3-24, 6-46.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, APR 1984

OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY

41158 OPERATORS

Section 1

INTRODUCTION
Page
About This Manual .. , ....................................... 1-1
Related Documentation ................................... 1-1
The4115BorM4115BPackage .............................. 1-1
General Description ......................................... 1-2
Terminal Features and Concepts ........................... 1-2
The Graphics Area .................................... 1-3
The Dialog Area ....................................... 1-4
Setup Mode .......................................... 1-4
Error Reporting ....................................... 1-5
Software Support ........................................ 1-5
Terminal Options ......................................... 1-5
Compatibility ............................................ 1-6

Section 2

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD
About This Section ....................................... 2-1
Controls on the Pedestal or Electronics Module ................. 2-1
The POWER Switch ...................................... 2-1
The Power-Up Sequence ............................... 2-4
Power-Up Defaults .................................... 2-5
The RESET Button ....................................... 2-5
The SELF TEST Button ................................... 2-5
WRITE PROTECT Switch and Indicator(s) .................. 2-7
Disk Drive Indicator(s) .................................... 2-7
The Display Controls ........................................ 2-8
The DEGAUSS/CONVERGE Button ........................ 2-8
The INTENSITY Control .................................. 2-8
The Keyboard .............................................. 2-9
Indicator Lights .......................................... 2-9
KYBD LOCK .......................................... 2-10
PAGE FULl. .......................................... 2-10
XMT ................................................. 2-10
RCV ................................................. 2-10
The Thumbwheels ....................................... 2-10
The ASCII Section ........................................ 2-11
Alphanumeric Keys .................................... 2-11
Control Keys .......................................... 2-12
Command Keys .......................................... 2-14
Page ................................................. 2-14
Caps Lock ............................................ 2-15
SET UP .............................................. 2-16
DIALOG .............................................. 2-16
CLEAR ............................................... 2-18
LOCAL ............................................... 2-18
CANCEL ............................................. 2-18
HARD COpy ......................................... 2-18
Function Keys ........................................... 2-19

REV, JAN 1984

Section 2 (cont)

Viewing Keys ............................................ 2-20
Framing Mode ........................................ 2-21
ViEW ................................................ 2-21
ZOOM and PAN ....................................... 2-21
OVERVIEW ........................................... 2-22
NORMAL ............................................. 2-22
NEXT VIEW .......................................... 2-22
RESTORE ............................................ 2-22
BORDER ............................................. 2-23
Connectors ................................................ 2-23
Display Unit Connectors .................................. 2-24
Pedestal and Electronics Module Connectors ............... 2-27
Standard Connectors .................................. 2-27
Optional Connectors ................................... 2-29
Section 3

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS
Introduction ................................................ 3-1
Files and File Transfers ...................................... 3-2
Files .................................................... 3-2
File Operations .......................................... 3-2
Using Disk Drives ................. _......................... 3-4
Option 42/43 Description .................................. 3-5
Basic Description ...................................... 3-5
Inserting and Removing a Disk .......................... 3-6
Handling a Disk ....................................... 3-6
Write-Protecting a Disk ................................. 3-7
Mass Storage Interface Description ........................ 3-7
Disk Drive Command Summary ............................ 3-9
Examples of Use ......................................... 3-9
Formatting a Disk ..................................... 3-9
The USERNUMBER Command ......................... 3-10
Changing a Disk ....................................... 3-10
Disk Directories ....................................... 3-11
Changing a File Name ................................. 3-12
Deleting a File ........................................ 3-12
Protecting a File ....................................... 3-12
Transferring Disk Files ................................. 3-12
COPY With Disk Files .................................. 3-12
The SPOOL Command ................................. 3-14
The SAVE Command With Disk Files ..................... 3-14
The LOAD Command With Disk Files .................... 3-14
Using the Three-Port Peripheral Interface ...................... 3-15
Command Summary .........•........................... 3-17

",,"--

iii

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

Section 3 (cant)

Using a Plotter .............................................. 3-17
Connecting the Plotter to the Terminal ...................... 3-17
Initializing the Port ....................................... 3-17
Examples of Use ......................................... 3-19
DIRECTORY to a Plotter ............................... 3-19
The PLOT Command .................................. 3-19
SAVEing to a Plotter ................................... 3-19
SPOOling to a Plotter ................................. 3-19
Direct Host-to-Plotter Copy ............................. 3-20
Using a Printer ............................................. 3-20
Examples of Use ......................................... 3-21
DIRECTORY to a Printer ............................... 3-21
COPYing to a Printer ................................... 3-21
SPOOling to a Printer ................................. 3-21
Using the 4923 Tape Drive ................................... 3-22
Using Other RS232 Devices .................................. 3-22
Using a 4691 Color Copier ................................... 3-22
Using a Multiplexed Color Copier ........................ 3-24
Using a Monochrome Hard Copy Unit ......................... 3-24
Using a Tablet Option ........................................ 3-26
Attaching the Tablet ...................................... 3-26
The Stylus ............................................... 3-28
POSitioning the Precision Grid ............................. 3-28
Cleaning the Tablet Surface ............................... 3-28
Restoring the Tablet Bias .................................. 3-29
Section 4

4115B OPERATORS

GRAPHICS INPUT MODE
Overview of GIN Mode ...................................... 4-1
The PICK Function ....................................... 4-1
The LOCATE Function .................................... 4-1
Inking ................................................... 4-1
Rubberbanding .......................................... 4-1
Gridding ................................................ 4-2
The STROKE Function ................................... 4-2
Using The Terminal's Thumbwheels ........................... 4-2
Using The Tablet ............................................ 4-3
The Stylus, the One-Button Cursor,
and the Four-Button Cursor ............................. 4-3
The Stylus ............................................ 4-3
The One-Button Cursor ................................ 4-3
The Four-Button Cursor ................................ 4-4
Using the 4662 or 4663 Plotter in GIN Mode .................... 4-4

REV, JAN 1984

SectionS

Section 6

HOST COMMUNICATIONS OVERVIEW
Standard Communications ................................... 5-2
Communications Concepts ................................ 5-2
Baud Rate .. ~ ......................................... 5-2
Parity ................................................ 5-2
Flagging ............................................. 5-2
Queue Size ........................................... 5-3
XMT Limit ............................................ 5-3
Break Time ........................................... 5-3
EOl String ........................................... 5-3
XMT Delay ........................................... 5-3
EOF String ....................... .' ................... 5-3
Stop Bits ............................................. 5-4
EOM Characters ...................................... 5-4
Bypass Cancel Character .............................. 5-4
Prompt Mode ............................................... 5-4
Block Mode ................................................ 5-5
BlENGTH .............................................. 5-5
BHEADERS ............................................. 5-5
BCONTINUECHARS ..................................... 5-5
BENDCHARS ........................................... 5-5
BLiNElENGTH .......................................... 5-5
BPACKING .............................................. 5-6
BTIMEOUT .............................................. 5-6
BNONXMTCHARS and BMASTERCHARS ................. 5-6
Half Duplex Mode ........................................... 5-6

SETUP COMMANDS
Setup Mode ................................................ 6-2
Escape Sequence Commands ............................... 6-2
Setup Memory.............................................. 6-2
Setup Command Summary .................................. 6-2
Setup Command Structure ................................... 6-7
Device Names and File Names ............................ 6-8
Device Names ......................................... 6-8
File Names ........................................... 6-9
Correcting Errors In Setup Commands ...................... 6-9
Command Syntax ........................................... 6-10

v
REV. JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

Section 6 (cant)
Command Dictionary ........................................ 6-11
BAUDRATE ............................................. 6-11
BCONTINUECHARS ..................................... 6-12
BENDCHARS ........................................... 6-12
BHEADERS ............................................. 6-13
BLENGTH .............................................. 6-13
BLINELENGTH .......................................... 6-14
BLOCKMODE ........................................... 6-14
8MASTERCHARS ....................................... 6-15
BNONXMTCHARS ....................................... 6-15
BPACKING .............................................. 6-16
BREAKTIME ............................................ 6-16
BTIMEOUT .............................................. 6-17
BYPASSCANCEL ........................................ 6-17
CMAP .................................................. 6-18
CMODE ................................................. 6-19
CODE .................................................. 6-21
COpy .................................................. 6-21
CRLF ................................................... 6-23
DA2INDEX .............................................. 6-24
DABUFFER ............................................. 6-24
DACHARS .............................................. 6-25
DAENABLE ............................................. 6-25
DAINDEX ............................................... 6-26
DALINES ............................................... 6-26
DAMODE ............................................... 6-27
DAPOSITION ............................................ 6-27
DASURFACE ............................................ 6-28
DAViS .................................................. 6-29
DEFINE ................................................. 6-30
DELETE ................................................ 6-32
DIRECTORy ............................................ 6-32
DISMOUNT ............................................. 6-34
DUPLEX ................................................ 6-34
ECHO .................................................. 6-35
EDiTCHARS ............................................ 6-35
EOFSTRING ............................................ 6-36
EOLSTRING ............................................ 6-37
EOMCHARS ............................................ 6-37
ERROR LEVEL .......................................... 6-38
FIXUP .................................................. 6-38
FLAGGING .............................................. 6-39
FORMAT ................................................ 6-39
GAMODE ............................................... 6-40
GINAREA ............................................... 6-40
GINCURSOR ............................................ 6-41
GINDISABLE ............................................ 6-41
GINENABLE ............................................ 6-42
GINGRIDDING .......................................... 6-42

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

Section 6 (cont)
GININKING ............................................. ,6-43
GINPICKAPERTURE ..................................... 6-43
GINRUBBERBAND ...................................... 6-44
GINSTARTPOINT ........................................ 6-44
GINWINDOW ............................................ 6-45
HCCOPIES .............................................. 6-45
HCDATARES ............................................ 6-46
HCINTERFACE .......................................... 6-46
HCORIENT.............................................. 6-47
HCRESERVE. ........................................... 6-48
IGNOREDEL ............................................ 6-49
KEYEXCHAR ............................................ 6-49
LFCR ................................................... 6-50
LOAD ................................................... 6-50
LOCKKEYBOARD ....................................... 6-51
LPOS ................................................... 6-51
PAGEFULL .............................................. 6-52
PARITY ................................................. 6-52
PASSIGN ............................................... 6-53
PBAUD ................................................. 6-54
PBITS .................................................. 6-54
PCOPY ................................................. 6-55
PEOF .................................... ', ............. . 6-56
PEOL ................................................... 6-56
PFLAG ................................................. 6-57
PLOT'................................................... 6-57
PMAP .................................................. 6-58
PPARITY ................................................ 6-58
PROMPTMODE ......................................... 6-59
PROMPTSTRING ........................................ 6-59
PROTECT .............................................. 6-60
QUEUESIZE ............................................ 6-60
RENAME ............................................... 6-61
RENEW ................................................. 6-61
REOM .................................................. 6-62
RLiNELENGTH .......................................... 6-62
RSIGCHARS ............................................ 6-63
SAVE ................................................... 6-63
SNOOPY ............................................... 6-64
SPOOL ................................................. 6-65
STATUS .......................... '....................... 6-66
STOP ............................. '...................... 6-68
STOPBITS .............................................. 6-68
TBFILTER ............................................... 6-69
TBHEADERCHARS ...................................... 6-69
TBSIZE ............................... '.................. 6-70
TBSTATUS .............................................. 6-70
USERNUMBER. ......................................... 6-71
XMTDELAY ............................................. 6-71
XMTLlMIT ........................................... '" . 6-72

vii

/" .-- . . .,

41158 OPERATORS
REV, JAN 1984

Appendi)( A

ERROR CODES
Introduction ................................................ A-1
Severity Levels .......................................... A-1
Error Codes ............................................. A-2
Commands Not Installed in the Terminal ................. A-2
Hardware Errors ......................................... A-3
Disk Hardware Errors .................................. A-3
Disk System Context Errors ............................. A-4
3PPI Hardware Errors .................................. A-4
DMA Transfer Errors ................................... A-5
TEK Error Codes ............................................ A-6
ANSI Error Codes ........................................... A-29

Appendbc B

POWER-UP SEQUENCE AND SELF TEST
The Power-Up Sequence .................................... B-1
Power-Up Error .......................................... B-1
Fatal Errors .............................................. B-2
Self Test ................................................... B-2
General Self Test ......................................... B-2
Submessages ........................................ B-4
Resetting Setup Memory .................................... B-5

Appendi)( C

ESCAPE SEQUENCE COMMANDS
Two Formats ............................................... C-1
Escape Sequences In Setup Mode ............................ C-1
Escape Sequences In Local Mode ............................ C-2
Escape Sequence Command Summary ....................... C-3

Appendb( D

ASCII CHARTS

Appendbc E

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS
Option 4A: United Kingdom Keyboard .........................
Option 4C: Swedish Keyboard ................................
Option 4F: Danish/Norwegian Keyboard .......................
Option 4K: Katakana Keyboard ...............................

E-1
E-3
E-3
E-6

Appendix F

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION
Example 1 -- Getting Ready .................................. F-2
Example 2 -- Manipulating the Dialog Area ..................... F-6
Example 3 -- Programming Keys .............................. F-10
Example 4 -- Entering Graphics and
Escape Sequence Commands ............................. F-11
Example 5 -- Manipulating a Segment and Using Viewing Keys ... F-13
Example 6 -- Using the Disk Drive and 3PPI .................... F-20
Example 7 -- Using Graphic Input ............................. F-22

Appendix G

COLOR STANDARD

Appendi)( H

ORDERING INFORMATION
INDEX

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

viii

ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
4-1
4-2
4-3

Description

Page

The 4115B Computer Display Terminal ............................. xiv
The M4115B Computer Display Terminal. ........................... xv
The Graphics and Dialog Area ..................................... 1-2
The Viewing Keys ................................................ 1-3
The Thumbwheels ............................................... 1-5
The POWER Switch .............................................. 2-2
The Air Vents .................................................... 2-3
The Power-Up Indicator Lights ..................................... 2-4
The RESET and SELF TEST Buttons ............................... 2-6
The WRITE PROTECT Switch, the WRITE PROTECT Indicator,
and the Disk Drive Indicator ..................................... 2-7
The Display Controls ............................................. 2-8
The Keyboard .................................................... 2-9
The Keyboard Indicator Lights ..................................... 2-9
The Thumbwheels ............................................... 2-11
The Alphanumeric Keys ........................................... 2-11
The Control Keys ................................................. 2-11
The Break Key ................................................... 2-14
The Command Keys .............................................. 2-15
Enabling the Dialog Area .......................................... 2-16
Communication Flow in Local Mode ................................ 2-18
Programmable Function Keys ..................................... 2-19
Non-Programmable Keys ......................................... 2-20
The Viewing Keys ................................................ 2-20
Connectors on the 4115B and M4115B Display ...................... 2-24
Connectors on the 4115B Pedestal .... '............................. 2-25
Connectors on the M4115B Electronics Module ...................... 2-26
The KEYBOARD Connector ....................................... 2-28
Option 42/43 Flexible Disk Drives .................................. 3-4
Flexible Disks .................................................... 3-5
Inserting a Disk .................................................. 3-6
Option 45 Rear Panel Connectors .................................. 3-8
Sample Directories ............................................... 3-11
Three-Port Peripheral Interface Panel .............................. 3-16
Color Copier Connector ........................................... 3-23
TO HARD COpy Connector ....................................... 3-25
Tablet Interface Connector ........................................ 3-27
Attaching the Tablet to the M4115B ................................. 3-28
Taking the Stylus Apart. ........................................... 3-29
Restoring the Tablet Bias .......................................... 3-29
The Crosshair Cursor ............................................. 4-2
The Thumbwheels ................................................ 4-2
The Option 13 Graphic Tablet ...................................... 4-3

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

Figure

6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
B-1
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
F-10
F-11
F-12
F-13
F-14
F-15
F-16
F-17
F-18
F-19
F-20
F-21
F-22

4115B OPERATORS

Description

Page

The SET UP Key ................................................. 6-1
Setup Command Format .......................................... 6-10
Limits for DAPOSITION ........................................... 6-27
Sample Directories ............................................... 6-33
Orientation of Copier Images to Media .............................. 6-47
The STATUS Report .............................................. 6-67
The Dialog Area STATUS Report ................................... 6-67
The STATUS BAUDRATE Report ................................... 6-67
The STATUS E Report ............................................ 6-67
The MASTER RESET and SELF TEST Buttons ...................... B-3
United Kingdom Keyboard ........................................ E-1
Swedish Keyboard ............................................... E-3
Danish/Norwegian Keyboard ...................................... E-3
Katakana Keyboard .............................................. E-6
The POWER Switch .............................................. F-2
The MASTER RESET and SELF TEST Buttons ...................... F-3
Self Test Menus .................................................. F-4
Page, DIALOG/CLEAR, SET Up, and Rtn Keys ...................... F-5
INTENSITY Control .............................................. F-5
STATUS EDITCHARS Report ...................................... F-6
Result of STATUS COMMUNICATIONS Command ................... F-7
The Thumbwheels ............................................... F-8
Adjusted Dialog Display of STATUS COMMUNICATIONS Report. ...... F-8
Relocated Dialog Area ............................................ F-9
Results of Programming a Key ..................................... F-10
Graphic Displays Created by Escape Sequence Commands .......... F-12
Display with Invisible Segment ..................................... F-13
The Viewing Keys ................................................ F-13
Display with Framing Box for ZOOM ................................ F-14
Adjusted Framing Box for ZOOM ................................... F-15
Framing Box with Crosshair for PAN ................................ F-16
Repositioned Framing Box for PAN ................................. F-17
Framing Box After ZOOM and PAN ................................. F-18
Display Updated with ViEW ....................................... F-19
Disk Drive Door Bar .............................................. F-20
Inserting a Disk .................................................. F-21

REV, JAN 1984

TABLES
Table

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
5-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
C-1
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4

Description

Page

File Transfer Commands .......................................... 3-3
Summary of Disk Drive Commands ................................. 3-9
Three-Port Peripheral Interface Command Summary ................. 3-17
4662 Plotter Settings ............................................. 3-17
4663 Plotter Setti ngs ............................................. 3-18
Port Settings For Printers ......................................... 3-20
4643 Serial Interface Board Settings ................................ 3-20
4641 (-1) Interface Card Settings ................................... 3-21
Tablet Setup Commands .......................................... 3-26
Communications Commands ...................................... 5-1
Setup Commands ................................................ 6-3
Default Colors ................................................... 6-19
CMODE Parameters .............................................. 6-20
Function Key Identifiers ........................................... 6-30
Disk Hardware Errors ............................................. A-3
Disk System Context Errors ....................................... A-4
3PPI Hardware Errors ............................................ A-4
DMA Transfer Errors .............................................. A-5
Escape Sequence Command Summary ............................ C-3
ASCII (ISO-7-US) Code Chart ...................................... 0-1
Characters Used in char Parameters ............................... 0-2
Characters Used in int Parameters ................................. 0-3
Characters Used in int-report Parameters ........................... 0-4
Characters Used in xy Parameters ................................. 0-5
Characters Used in xy-report Parameters ........................... 0-6
United Kingdom Character Set. .................................... E-2
Swedish Character Set ........................................... E-4
Danish/Norwegian Character Set .................................. E-5
Katakana Character Set. .......................................... E-7

/,r---

REV, JAN 1984

41156 OPERATORS

This general safety information is for both operating and servicing personnel. Specific warnings and cautions will be found
throughout the manual where they apply, but may not appear in this summary.

TERMS

POWER SOURCE

IN THIS MANUAL
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that
can result in damage to the equipment or other property.

This product is designed to operate from a power source
that does not apply more than 250 volts rms between the
supply conductors or between either supply conductor and
ground. A protective ground connection by way of the
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe
operation.

WARNING statements identify conditions or practices that
can result in personal injury or loss of life.

GROUNDING THE PRODUCT
AS MARKED ON EQUIPMENT

This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, plug the power
cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to
the power input or output terminals. A protective ground
connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power
cord is essential for safe operation.

CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as one reads the marking, or a hazard to
property including the equipment itself.
DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately
accessible as one reads the marking.

DANGER ARISING FROM
lOSS OF GROUND

SYMBOLS

Upon loss of the protective-ground connection, all accessible conductive parts (including knobs and controls that may
appear to be insulating) can render an electric shock.

IN THIS MANUAL

Ij\

This symbol indicates where applicable cautionary or

~ other information is to be found.

As Marked on Equipment

::#

DANGER high Voltage.

Protective ground (earth) terminal.

ATTENTION -

Refer to manual.

4115B OPERATORS

USE THE PROPER POWER CORD
Use only the power cord and connector specified for your
product.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service
personnel.

refer to manual.

REV, JAN 1984

xii

USE THE PROPER FUSE

DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR PANELS

To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse specified in the parts
list for your product, and which is identical in type, voltage
rating, and current rating.

To avoid personal injury, do not remove the product covers
or panels. Do not operate the product without the covers
and panels properly installed.

Refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel.

DO NOT OPERATE IN
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an atmosphere of explosive gases unless it has been specifically
certified for such operation.

xiii

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

4665-1

Figure 1·1. The 4115B Computer Display Terminal.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

xiv

(

Figure 1-2. The M4115B Computer Display Terminal.

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

RELATED DOCUMENTATION
This manual introduces you to the TEKTRONIX 4115B and
M4115B Computer Display Terminals, which come with
firmware version 6.0 and greater. This manual discusses in
detail the terminals' features and capabilities that you, the
operator, might use. The manual is organized like this:
Section 1

4110 Series Host Programmers lvlanual

o 4110 Series Reference Guide
Appendix H lists additional documentation - for servicing
the terminal and for the terminal's options - and provides
ordering information.

Describes all external controls, the
light indicators, the keyboard, and the
connectors.

Section 3

Discusses files and file transfers. Also
describes the various peripheral devices
that you may use with the terminal, including typical terminal operations with these
devices.

Section 4

Introduces GIN (Graphics Input) mode.

Section 5

Discusses the various terminal communications modes and parameters. The correct parameter settings are necessary for
communications with the host and peripheral devices. (Table 5-1 summarizes these
parameters for handy reference.)

Appendices

o 4115B Introduction Brochure
o 4110 Series Command Reference Manual

Contains introductory material about the
4115B and the M4115B terminals, their
features, and their capabilities.

Section 2

Section 6

In addition to this operators manual, you may want to refer
to these manuals:

Contains a command dictionary of all setup
commands that you will normally use.
The appendices contain various types of
reference information. For example, they
contain information on the terminal's error
messages, the power-up sequence, the
terminal's self test, the optional keyboards,
ASCII code charts, and the escape
sequence commands normally issued from
the host. Appendix F is a tutorial designed
to acquaint you with the terminal.

The standard 4115B or M4115B Computer Display Terminal
package includes:
o The 4115B Computer Display Terminal (with the display,
the keyboard, and the pedestal, as shown in Figure 1-1),
OR the M4115B Computer Display Terminal (with the
display, the keyboard, and the electronics module, as
shown in Figure 1-2)

o 4115B Introduction Brochure

o 4115BIM4115B Computer Display Terminal Operators
Manual (this manual)
o 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual

o 4110 Series Command Reference Manual
o 4110 Series Reference Guide
o Power cord set (two cords)
o Display cables (3 BNC cables and 1 control cable)
o One RS-232-C host port cable
o Six function key overlays
Appendix H lists accessories for the terminal.

Before reading this manual, please complete the tutorial
exercises in Appendix F (or in the 4115B Introduction
Brochure - the same exercises are contained in both
documents) to become familiar with the basic features and
operation of the terminal.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

1-1

INTRODUCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The 41158 and M41158 Computer Display Terminals are
microprocessor-controlled color graphics and alphanumeric
terminals.

WARNING

• The terminal's thumbwheels provide an easy means to
scroll through dialog text, to send graphics input (GIN)
information to the host, and to define a new view when
using the terminal's viewing keys.
• The terminal simultaneously displays up to 256 colors
(with Option 23) from a palette of over 16 million different
colors.
• An autoconvergence feature assures maximum color
quality and integrity. (Autoconvergence is the process of
realigning the red, blue, and green color beams that
create colors on the display. See The DEGA USS/CONVERGE Button in Section 2.)

The display on the 4115B is not attached to the
pedestal. If you move the pedestal, be sure that the
display does not fall.
The 41158 terminal (Figure 1-1) consists of a 19-inch display that sits on a pedestal base containing the electronics;
the keyboard sits on a tray that conveniently slides out of
the pedestal.
The M41158 terminal (Figure 1-2) is a modular version of
the 41158 terminal. The M41158 consists of the same 19inch display, the same keyboard, and a separate electronics
module (instead of a pedestal). The display and keyboard
cables supplied with the M41158 are longer, allowing you to
position the electronics module a few feet away from the
display.

*STATIIS COm.ltHCATIOttS
COm.J!1ICATIDttS
8AUDRATE •••••••••••

»fTI...IMIT.••••••••
51UPBITS .•.•••
lG'fT1JELAy •••••••
PARITY •••••••••
PRIJIf'lS1RING •..
PROffITl'IJOE. ••••
~EUESI2E ••..••
Fl.JlGG1JtG •••••••

EM"""S ..•..••
EtLS1RIItG •••••••
EtJFS1RIItG •••••••••• "

TERMINAL FEATURES AND CONCEPTS

BREAKTlI£. •• • • ••••• 2lI8

B'TI'ASSCAtCa ....... ..

These are the main features of the 41158 and M41158
Computer Display Terminals:
• A resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels gives high-quality
graphics displays. (A pixel is the smallest visible dot on
the crt screen.)
• A 32-bit terminal coordinate space is addressable at over
4 billion points along each coordinate axis. 8ecause of
this high internal data resolution, when you use the terminal's ZOOM and PAN features to expand a portion of
the display, the terminal maintains the sharpness and
detail of the image.
• Multiple bit planes give up to eight separate graphics
surfaces (with Option 23) that can be displayed independently. (A bit plane refers to memory used for storing
graphics information.)
• A separate dialog plane is used to display your conversations with the terminal or the host computer. The dialog
text can be displayed "over" the graphics, allowing your
graphics to be visible behind the text. Or, by toggling the
DIALOG key, you can make the dialog text invisible, to
view only the graphics. (Figure 1-3 is a black and white
representation of this feature.)

1-2

REV, JAN 1984

Figure 1-3. The Graphics and Dialog Areas.

4115B OPERATORS

INTRODUCTION

o A drawing speed of up to 50,000 vectors a second, along
with data transmission speeds of up to 19,200 bits per
second, allows the terminal to redraw complex displays
almost instantaneously.
o A detached low-profile keyboard provides convenient,
comfortable typing.
o The keyboard's indicator lights inform you when the
terminal is in a particular mode, when it is transmitting or
receiving data, or when it detects an error during its selftest procedures.
o The self-test diagnostic programs in the terminal's firmware check the terminal's operation each time it is
turned on. If an error is detected, the terminal displays a
pattern on the light indicators or a message on the display screen. You can then report these messages to your
Tektronix service technician to correct the problem more
quickly.
o An optional color copy interface (Option 09) lets you
make color copies of the screen on a TEKTRONIX 4691
Color Graphics Copier. With the three-port peripheral
interface option (Option 10), the terminal can also make
color plots on a TEKTRONIX 4662 or 4663 Interactive
Digital Plotter. (The terminal's options and compatible
Tektronix products are listed at the end of this section.)

The Graphics Area
The terminal is designed for high-speed graphics information processing. It contains a firmware-resident command
set that includes several dozen graphics commands. (The
4110 Series Command Reference Manual documents the
commands.)

In the tutorial session in Appendix F, Example 4 shows you
how to create segments using the terminal's graphics commands. Then Example 5 illustrates how to manipulate
graphics segments with commands and the viewing keys.
Figure 1-4 shows the viewing keys. With the ZOOM and
PAN keys you can focus in on a part of a segment and press
the VIEW key to display it. By ZOOMing and PANning several times, you can enlarge a part of a segment in detail.
With the OVERVIEW key, you can get an overview window
that shows the portion of the segment you expanded with
ZOOM and PAN. While you are using the viewing keys, you
can redisplay the previous view by pressing the RESTORE
key. (Section 2 includes a more thorough description of the
viewing keys and the operations you can perform with
them.)
Surfaces. Using multiple bit planes, the terminal can display up to eight separate graphics surfaces. (A bit plane
refers to the terminal memory used to store each graphics
surface.) Each surface has its own aSSignment of colors and
can display its own set of graphics information. Surfaces
can be displayed in various modes to allow later graphics to
obscure earlier graphics, or to allow the earlier graphics to
show through (like layers of colored glass).
Multiple Views. The screen can be divided into as many as
64 individual views, each with its own viewport, window,
etc. (A viewport is an area on the screen where the window
is displayed; a window refers to the portion of terminal
memory currently displayed. The 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual contains more information on these concepts.)
You can manipulate the segments in each view with the
viewing keys.

Using graphics commands, either stored locally on the
terminal or from a host software program, the terminal can
create and modify color graphics images in the graphics
area. (The graphics area refers to the area on the screen
where the terminal displays graphics pictures, as opposed
to the dialog area, which displays your conversations with
the terminal and the host. See Figure 1-3.)
Other graphics commands can cause the terminal to transmit data back to the host computer, to store graphics on a
local mass-storage device, or to produce high-quality color
hard copies of the display.
Segments. A graphics segment is a part of a picture that can
be manipulated as a unit by terminal commands or with the
viewing keys.
Figure 1-4. The Viewing Keys.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

1-3

INTRODUCTION

Graphics Input (GIN). Graphics input (or GIN) mode allows
you to send graphic information to a host-resident program
from the terminal, a plotter, or a graphics tablet. With the
thumbwheels (Figure 1-5) you can move the GIN cursor and
select information to send to the host. Section 4 gives an
overview of GIN mode, and the 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual explains GIN concepts in more detail.

The Dialog Area
You can display your conversations with the terminal or host
computer in the graphics area, or you can display them in
the dialog area. The dialog area is a portion of the screen
that you define for displaying terminal and host commands.
Because the dialog area is assigned a separate "surface"
in the terminal from the graphics surfaces, you can display
dialog text without it interfering with graphics on the terminal screen. You can make the dialog text visible or invisible
(by pressing the DIALOG key, for example) to switch back
and forth between graphics and dialog text. With the
thumbwheels (Figure 1-5), you can scroll up or down in the
dialog area.

The dialog buffer is a part of terminal memory that stores
the dialog text. When the dialog area is enabled and visible,
text in the dialog buffer is displayed in the dialog area.
When the dialog area is invisible, the dialog area retains
dialog text for the next time you make the area visible.
The terminal responds to a set of ANSI commands but only
when those commands are issued in the dialog area. The
ANSI commands are a subset of the text-editing commands
specified in ANSI Standard X3.64V (ISO Standard 6429).
They allow you to use the terminal as an alphanumeric
terminal to create and modify text in the dialog area. Using
color in the dialog area can enhance the impact or content
of the text. (See the 4110 Series Command Reference Manual for descriptions of the ANSI commands.)
The dialog area is discussed in more detail in Section 2
(under the discussion of the DIALOG key).

Setup Mode
In Setup mode, you can prepare (or "set up") the terminal
for a variety of functions, with English-like setup commands.
These commands are used, for example, to prepare the
terminal for communications, to describe and position the
dialog area, to specify what errors the terminal should
report, to control peripheral functions, and to perform other
terminal functions.
You can enter setup commands directly from the keyboard,
or they may come from the host computer, perhaps in an
initialization program. Section 6 is a dictionary that
describes the setup commands in detail.
To place the terminal in Setup mode, press the SETUP key
at the top of the keyboard. The red light in the key goes on
to indicate that Setup mode is active. To exit Setup mode,
just press the Setup key again.
Most setup information is retained even when the terminal
is turned off. This means that you do not need to reenter
setup commands every time you use the te~minal, unless
you want to change some of the setup parameters.

Figure 1-5. The Thumbwheels.

1-4

Each setup command has an equivalent escape sequence
command (an escape sequence command is a graphics command that begins with the escape (EC) character). You can
enter both setup commands and escape sequence commands in Setup mode. (Refer to the 4110 Series Command
Reference Manual for descriptions of the escape sequence
commands.)

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

INTRODUCTION

Error Reporting

TERMINAL OPTIONS

When the terminal detects an error condition, it is recorded
in an internal error queue and may be displayed on the
screen. There are four levels of errors. You can establish an
error threshold. which determines what level of error messages are displayed on the screen, with the setup command
ERROR LEVEL (see ERROR LEVEL in Section 6).

The following options are available for the 4115B and
M4115B terminals:
Option 01

Extended Communications Interface -includes
half-duplex and block mode.

Option 09

Interface for TEKTRONIX 4691 Color Graphics
Copier.

Other error messages - associated with the disk or three
port peripheral interface options - may appear on the
screen to indicate a hardware-related problem.

Option 10

Three-Port Peripheral Interface (3PPI).

Option 13

Graphic Tablet (size: 11 x 11 ") with controller.

Appendix A lists the terminal's error messages.

Option 14

Graphic Tablet (size: 30 x 40") with controller.

Option 22

Additional 2 Planes Display Memory (increases
the number of available bit-planes from four to
six).

Option 23

Additional 4 Planes Display Memory (increases
the number of available bit-planes from four to
eight).

SOFTWARE SUPPORT
The 4115B and M4115B terminals are compatible with 4010
Series graphics software. In most cases, a program written
for a Tektronix 4010 Series terminal can be executed
unmodified on the 4115B or M4115B. You can make modifications to existing software to take advantage of the new
4 i 15B features - color, use of the dialog area, new features of GIN (Graphics Input), and new graphics features
(such as segments and panels).

Option 2A Additional 256K Bytes (for 512K byte total) ECC
Memory; additional RAM Array board.

These TEKTRONIX PLOT 10 products can drive the 4115B
and M4115B terminals:

Option 3A DMA Interface (for PDP-11 and VAX
computers).

o Interactive Graphics Library

Option 3B 30-foot cable for Option 3A.

o Terminal Control System and associated packages

Option 42

Single Flexible Disk and Controller (includes
Option 45 with Mass Storage Interface
connector).

Option 43

Dual Flexible Disks and Controller (includes
Option 45 with Mass Storage Interface
connector).

Option 45

Mass Storage Interface.

Option 2B Additional 512K Bytes (for 768K byte total) ECC
Memory; additional Controller board and two
RAM Array boards.

o Easy Graphing
If you are already using 4110 Series software, the transition
is even simpler - any 4110 Series software should run on
the 4115B and M4115B as is. You may want to enhance
existing 4110 Series programs, however, to take advantage
of the 4115B and M4115B's wider range of color and larger
coordinate space.

Option 46' Single 1O-Megabyte Disk (without controller;
requires Option 42 or Option 45; cannot be
used with Option 43).
Option 47' Dual10-Megabyte Disks (without controller;
requires Option 42 or Option 45; cannot be
used with Option 43).

M4115B only.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

1-5

INTRODUCTION

Option 49

COMPATIBILITY

Rental identification tag.

Option 4A United Kingdom keyboard.
Option 4C Swedish keyboard.

The 41158 and M41158 terminals are compatible with the
following Tektronix products:

Option 4F Danish/Norwegian keyboard.

• 4691 Color Graphics Copier

Option 4K Katakana keyboard.

• 4662 and 4663 Interactive Digital Plotters

Option 52

• 4925 DuaI5V4-lnch Flexible Disk Drives

Customer Specified Line Voltage, frequency,
and power cord.

• 4926 1O-Megabyte Hard Disk Drive

Option A 1 Universal European Line voltage, frequency,
and power cord: 220 V, 16 A, 50 Hz.

• 4926 Option 26 Dual 1O-Megabyte Hard Disk Drives
• 4926 Option 25 10-Megabyte Hard Disk with DuaI5V4Inch Flexible Disk Drives

Option A2 United Kingdom line voltage, frequency, and
power cord: 240 V, 13 A, 50 Hz.

• 4641, 4641-1, and 4643 Line Printers

Option A3 Australian line voltage, frequency, and power
cord: 240 V, 10 A, 50 Hz.

• 4923 Option 01 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive

Option A4 North American line voltage, frequency, and
power cord: 240 V, 15 A, 60 Hz.
Option A5 Swiss line voltage, frequency, and power cord:
220 V, 6 A, 50 Hz.

'-6

Section 3 contains additional information on connectors
for some of these peripheral devices and typical device
operations.

REV, APR 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ABOUT THiS

SECTIO~\l

This section introduces you to the controls, indicators, keyboard, and connectors for the 41158 and M41158 terminals. This section covers:
o The controls and light indicators on the 41158 and
M41158 terminals.

After the descriptions of the controls and indicators, this
section introduces the keyboard - the keyboard indicator
lights, the keyboard layout, and the special function keys.
Then this section briefly discusses the terminals' connectors; most connectors are located on the rear panel of the
41158 pedestal or M41158 electronics module, or on the
rear panel of the display.

o The keyboard layout and special keys.
o The connectors on both terminals.

CONTROLS ON

This section describes the locations of the controls, indicators, switches, and keys that you will use to operate the
terminal.

[El[ECTAON~CS

On the 41158 terminal, the controls, indicators, and connectors are located on the display and the pedestal; on the
M41158 terminal, they are located on the display and the
electronics module.
This section first describes the controls and indicators that
are located on the front of the pedestal, the electronics
module, and the display, in this order:

POWER switch
MASTER RESET button

SELF TEST button

WRITE PROTECT switches (Options 42, 43)

WRITE PROTECT indicators (Options 42, 43)

Disk Drive Indicators

Display Unit
o

DEGAUSS/CONVERGE button

INTENSITY control

41158 OPERATORS

MOlQ)UllrE

THE POWER SWITCH
Figure 2-'1 shows the location of the POWER switch on the
41158 and M41158 terminals. The POWER switch controls
AC power to the entire terminal (even though the display,
the pedestal, and the electronics module each have their
own AC power cord - see Connectors later in this section).

~~]

Pedestal or Electronics Module

u~HE ~E[Cj)[ESTAl O~1

Do not block the air vents (Figure 2-2) on either the
display unit, the pedestal, or the electronics module. If any vents are blocked, the terminal may
overheat, causing damage to its circuitry. (The
bumpers on the sides of the electronics module will
help ensure that you do not accidentally block the
module's air vents.)
To turn the terminal on, push the POWER switch in until it
clicks; then release it. A green indicator appears in the
switch to indicate that the power is on. You should hear the
ventilation fans inside the pedestal or the electronics module turn on.

REV, JAN 1984

2-1

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Figure 2-1. The POWER Switch.

(
\

2-2

REV, JAN 1984

4115B OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

DISPLAY UNIT
AIR VENTS

ELECTRONICS MODULE
. AIR VENTS

PEDESTAL
AIR VENTS
(ON REAR)

4665-73

Figure 2-2. The Air Vents.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-3

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

The Power-Up Sequence
Each time you turn the terminal on, it automatically tests
parts of its memory and circuitry. This is called the power-up
sequence. It takes from 15 to 60 seconds, depending on
what options your terminal has.
During the power-up sequence, the lights in the keyboard
(Figure 2-3) go through the following sequence:
1.

All lights turn on.

The CAPS LOCK light turns off.

All other lights turn off.

The XMT and RCV lights flash once
simultaneously.

If the power-up sequence detects an error, the terminal bell
rings one, two, or three times, depending on the severity of
the problem. There may also be a message on the screen. If
this occurs, see Appendix A.
If the power-up sequence is successful, the cursor flashes
in the upper left corner of the screen. As soon as the cursor
appears on the screen, the terminal is ready for use. If the
dialog area is enabled (see DIALOG later in this section),
the cursor appears on the first available line of the dialog
area.

Figure 2-3. The Power-Up Indicator Lights.

(\, ..

2-4

REV, JAN 1984

4115B OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

THE RESET BUTTON

Power-Up Defaults
With setup commands entered from the host or directly from
the terminal, you can alter certain parameters that control
the terminal's operating environment. The terminal stores
the results of these changes in its setup memory and
remembers the changes even when the terminal is turned
off. Table 6-1 (in the beginning of Section 6) lists these
power-up defaults.
Table 6-1 also lists the factory defaults for the terminal's
operating environment. Factory default means the setting
that the terminal has when it is shipped from the factory. If
you alter any parameters with setup commands, the status
of your terminal may differ from what Table 6-1 shows. You
can use the STATUS command to determine the current
status of most operating parameters; see the description of
the STATUS command in Section 6.
If the terminal's setup memory fails, the operating environment returns to the factory default settings. If this happens,
the terminal displays the message:
SETUP DEFAULTS RESET
during the power-up sequence (see Appendix B).
At times, you may want to reset the parameters to the factory default settings; for this procedure, see the heading
Resetting Setup Memory in Appendix B.

NOTE

Do not press the RESET button if there is important information stored in the terminal's memory.
Resetting the terminal deletes all graphics data as
well as macros that have been programmed into
keys.
Pressing the RESET button (Figure 2-4) has the same effect
as turning off the terminal and turning it back on again:
o Macros are deleted from any programmed keys.
o Graphics data is deleted from the terminal's main
memory.
o The terminal runs its power-up sequence.
o The screen is erased.
You can save information before resetting the terminal by
saving the data in a host file, or by saving it to a disk file if
you have one of the disk drive options (see Section 3). Or, if
you have a hard copy unit connected, you can make a hard
copy of the screen (the HARD COpy key is discussed later
in this section).

THE SElf TEST BUTTON

Setup mode and setup commands are discussed later in
this section under the heading SET UP; Section 6 describes
each setup command individually.

Pressing the SELF TEST button in conjunction with the
RESET button (Figure 2-4) starts an extensive test of the
terminal. This self-test provides information so that a service technician can make necessary adjustments to the
terminal. Appendix B gives a more detailed explanation of
self-test.
The SELF TEST and RESET buttons are also used together
to reset the terminal's parameters to their factory default
settings. Appendix B includes the procedure for restoring
the factory default settings.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-5

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Figure 2-4. The RESET and SELF TEST Buttons.

2-6

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

WRITE PROTECT SWITCH t\ND INDICATOR(S)
WRITE PROTECT
INDICATOR

The terminal may have one or two flexible disk drives
(Options 42 and 43). These are located in the pedestal
(41158) or in the electronics module (M41158). Figure 2-5A
shows where the write-protect switch is located on the
41158 pedestal; Figure 2-58 shows the write-protect switch
on a M41158's electronics module.

WRITE PROTECT
SWITCH

When a disk is in a drive and you turn on the WRITE PROTECT switch, the disk in the drive is write-protected. When a
disk is write-protected, the terminal will not write data on it.
This prevents you from writing over (and thus destroying)
data already on a disk.
Press the switch up to protect the disk (and turn on the
light). You can also protect a disk by covering the writeprotect notch in the disk itself (see Section 3).

NOTE

Individualfiles on a disk can also be write-protected. See the PROTECT command description in
Section 6.
If there is no disk in a drive, the red WRITE PROTECT light
is always on; it cannot be turned off.

A. On ihe 41158 Pedestal.
WRITE PROTECT
INDICATOR

DBSK DRiVE INDICATOR(S)
When the red disk drive indicator (Figure 2-5) is on, the disk
drive is active; the drive is either reading from or writing to
the disk. When the light is off, the drive is not operating.

~~
Do not open the disk drive's door when the disk
drive indicator light is on and the drive is operating.
Doing so interrupts the read or write operation in
progress. Wait until the read or write is finished and
the light goes out before removing the disk.

UUU

111111

IUIII

Section 3 explains the use of the disk drives.

111111
4665·75

Figure 2-5. The WRITE PROTECT Switch, the WRITE PROTECT
Indicator, and the Disk Drive Indicator.

41156 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-7

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

THE DISPLAY CONTROLS

deterioration of colors, press and release the DEGAUSS/
CONVERGE button.

THE DEGAUSS/CONVERGE BUTTON

Pressing the button erases the screen momentarily; then a
series of red, green, and blue bars repeats in different locations on the screen. This repetitive flashing of color bars
aligns the beams in various parts of the screen. After the
bars stop flashing, the display is restored, and the quality of
the colors should be improved.

Pressing the DEGAUSS/CONVERGE button (Figure 2-6)
initiates the display's autoconvergence process - the process of "converging" or aligning the red, green, and blue
beams that create colors on your display.
Occasionally the colors on your display may appear to be
impure or muddled. (For example, you may notice a shadow
of one color behind text characters or graphics of another
color.) When the display unit is subjected to normal variations in electrical or magnetic field intensity, the purity and
accuracy of colors may be degraded. If you notice some

THE INTENSITY CONTROL
The INTENSITY control is used to adjust the intensity - or
brightness - of the display (Figure 2-6). Turn the control
clockwise to brighten the display; turn it counterclockwise to
dim the display.

Figure 2-6. The Display Controls.

(

2-8

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

KEYBOARD
LOCK

The keyboard is shown in Figure 2-7.

PAGE
FULL

XMT

RCV

The keys can be grouped into six categories:
o ASCII Keys
o The Thumbwheels
o The Break Key
o Command Keys
o Function Keys
o Viewing Keys

INDiCATOR LIGHTS
The keyboard also includes four indicator lights (Figure 2-8):
the KYBD LOCK light, the PAGE FULL light, the XMT light,
and the RCV light.

FUNCTION
KEYS

Figure 2-8. The Keyboard Indicator Lights.

INDICATOR
LIGHTS

ASCII KEYS
(TYPEWRITER-LIKE KEYS)

THE BREAK
KEY

COMMAND
KEYS

THUMBWHEELS

VIEWING
KEYS

4665·4

Figure 2-7. The Keyboard

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-9

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

KYBDLOCK
When the KYBD LOCK light (Figure 2-8) is on, the keyboard
is locked. A program may lock the keyboard to prevent you
from typing anything at a time when dOing so would interfere with data being sent from the host.

The terminal can also be set to make a hard copy of the
screen, erase the screen, and continue automatically when
it reaches a page-full condition. See the PAGEFULL setup
command in Section 6 for details.

XMT
When the keyboard is locked, you can still press the keys,
but data is not transmitted, echoed, or queued. When you
press any key (except Break or CANCEL) the terminal's bell
rings to remind you that data is not being input.

The abbreviation XMT stands for transmit. The transmit
light (Figure 2-8) is on when data is being sent from the
terminal to the host computer.

The program should unlock the keyboard when the transmission of the critical data is complete.

RCV

You can also unlock the keyboard by pressing the MASTER
RESET button or the CANCEL or Break keys. However, you
should use MASTER RESET, CANCEL, and Break with
caution. The MASTER RESET button deletes information in
the terminal's memory, including any text or graphics currently stored there. The CANCEL key terminates several
terminal functions besides the locked keyboard. The Break
key can have undesirable effects on some host computers.

The abbreviation RCV stands for receive. The receive light
(Figure 2-8) is on when data is being received by the terminal from the host computer.

THE THUMBWHEELS
The thumbwheels (Figure 2-9) have three uses:
• To scroll the dialog area.

For further details, see the explanations of MASTER
RESET, Break, and CANCEL in this section and the
LOCKKEYBOARD command in Section 6.

• To move the GIN cursor. This cursor is used to locate a
point on the screen to be sent to a graphics program
being run from a host computer.

PAGE FULL

• To manipulate the framing box when the terminal is in
Framing mode.

When the PAGE FULL light (Figure 2-8) is on, the terminal is
in the "page-full" condition. It will not display any more text
or graphics until the page-full condition is cleared by:
• Pressing the HARD COpy key, which makes a copy of
the page, clears the screen, and allows another page to
be displayed.

The dialog area is discussed later in this section, under the
heading DIALOG. Using the thumbwheels when the terminal is in Graphics Input (GIN) mode is discussed in
Section 4. Examples of how to use the thumbwheels are
contained in Appendix F or in the 4115B Introduction

Brochure.

• Pressing the Page key, which clears the screen and
allows another page to be displayed.
• Pressing any key except Shift, which eliminates the
page-full condition and allows the display to write new
data over existing data.

2-10

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Alphanumeric Keys

THE ASCII SECTION
The main keyboard section consists of the ASCII keys (see
Figure 2-7), so called because each one generates one of
the ASCII characters (see the ASCII Code Chart appendix).
The ASCII keys are divided into alphanumeric keys and
control keys. These are discussed under the following
headings.

NOTE

Four optional keyboards are available for international use (see Appendix E). Descriptions in this
section apply only to the standard keyboard.
The alphanumeric section of the keyboard looks like a typewriter keyboard (Figure 2-10). The alphanumeric keys transmit the characters shown on their keycaps to the terminal or
to a host computer. These are also called printing characters
since they have symbolic representations which are printed,
or echoed, on the screen or printed by a line printer.
The space is a printing character.
If the terminal's Autorepeat feature is enabled and you hold
down an alphanumeric key for more than half a second, the
character repeats at a rate of 10 times per second until you
release the key or press another key.
When the terminal is in Local or Setup mode and you press
an alphanumeric key, it is displayed (echoed) on the screen.
Whether the characters are echoed when you are logged
onto a host computer depends on whether the terminal or
the host is providing the echo. See the ECHO command in
Section 6 for details.

Figure 2-9. The Thumbwheels.

The character normally transmitted by an alphanumeric key
can be replaced by a macro (a character or character string
programmed into the key). This is explained later in this
section under the heading Function Keys.

4665-15

Figure 2-10. The Alphanumeric Keys.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-11

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Control Keys
A control character is a character that has special meaning
for the terminal or host computer. The terminal can send
and receive all standard control characters. When some
control characters are transmitted, you cannot see their
result on the display. Others, however, cause visible
changes in the display. For example, the carriage return
control character causes the cursor to return to the left
margin; the line feed control character causes the cursor to
move down one line.

The Ctrl and Shift keys are included in the following description of the control keys because they are used to specify
control characters that are not represented on the
keyboard.
The Rub Out Key. The Rub Out key sends the rub out (or
delete) character.
Rub Out is the factory default character delete key in Setup
mode. See the explanation of the EDITCHARS command in
Section 6.
The Line Feed Key. This key sends the line feed character,
which causes the cursor to move down to the next line without returning it to the left margin. If the cursor is at the bottom of the screen and is not in the dialog area, a line feed
moves it to the top of the screen one margin to the right of
the current margin. When the cursor is at the bottom of the
last column, a line feed either causes it to move to the top of
the first column or causes a page-full condition (see
PAGEFULL in Section 6).

There are six control characters that have their own keys
(Figure 2-11):
• Rub Out (delete)
• Line Feed (line feed)
• Back Space (backspace)
• Rtn (carriage return)
• Esc (escape)
• Tab (horizontal tab)

Back
Space

Rub
Out

Esc

Line
Feed

Tab

Ctrl

Return

Shift

4665·16

Figure 2-11. The Control Keys.

2-12

REV, JAN 1984

·41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

You can use the setup command LFCR to cause a line feed
received from the host computer (or from the terminal when
it is in Local mode) to cause the terminal to generate a line
feed and carriage return (see Section 6).

The Ctrl Key. Some control characters are used often and
have their own keys, such as Rtn and Line Feed. Others,
however, do not. You can transmit any control character by
holding down the Ctrlkey while you press another key.

The Back Space Key. The Bacl< Space key sends the backspace character, which moves the cursor one character

For example, press Ctrl and the G key (Ctrl-G) at the same
time to send the ASCII Bel character, which causes the
terminal bell to sound; Ctrl-M sends a carriage return character, causing the cursor to return to the left margin; Ctrl-J
sends the line feed character, causing the cursor to go down
one line.

position to the left.
The following explanation applies when the terminal is not
in Setup mode or connected to a host. If the cursor is in the
dialog area and is already at the left margin when you press
the Back Space key, the cursor does not move. If the cursor
is not in the dialog area and is already at the left margin
when you press the Back Space key, there is no effect.
The Rtn Key. The Rtn key sends the carriage return control
character, which returns the cursor to the left margin of the
current line.
Some host computers automatically include a line feed
when they echo or send the return character, so that pressing the Rtn key moves the cursor down one line and to the
left margin. If your host does not, you can use the setup
command CRLF (explained in Section 6) to cause the terminal to include a line feed with the return character.
In Setup mode, the terminal automatically provides a carriage return and line feed when you press the Rtn key.

The Shift Key. Most keys have two meanings: an unshifted
meaning and a shifted meaning.
When you press the key labeled W while holding down the
Shift key, the terminal sends the uppercase character W;
pressing the same key without the Shift (if the Caps Lock
key light is not on) sends the lowercase letter w. Some keys
are labeled with two non-alphabetic characters, one above
the other. For example, press the key labeled 5 to transmit a
5; press the same key and the Shift key to send the percent
(%) character.
Programmable function keys and the non-programmable
command keys can also have shifted and unshifted meanings, as explained under the headings Command Keys later
in this section.
The Shift key is also used at the same time as the Ctrl key to
send some control characters.

The Esc Key. When you press Esc, the terminal sends
the escape character when it is communicating with a host
computer.
The escape is the first character in a special command
sequence called an escape sequence. Appendix C lists the
escape sequence commands. For detailed explanations of
all escape sequence commands, see the 4110 Series Host

The Break ~(ey. The Break key (Figure 2-12) can be used to
interrupt communications from some host computers to the
terminal. It does not actually send a character to the host;
instead it alters the state of the communications line so that
the computer stops sending information to the terminal or
stops the execution of a program.

Programmers Reference Manual.
The Tab Key. The Tab key transmits the horizontal tab
character.

Depending on how your host treats this character, it can
cause the cursor to move a certain number of spaces to the
right.

Before using the Break key, or the BREAKTIME
command, find out how the host computer handles
the interrupt. An unexpected Break signal could
cause program failure or equipment damage.

When the terminal is in Local mode, the cursor moves one
character to the right each time you press the Tab key.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-13

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

The length of time that the interrupt lasts is important to
some host computers. You can use the setup command
BREAKTIME to specify the length of the interrupt sent by
the terminal to the host, or to disable the Break key, as
explained in Section 5.

The eight command keys are:

It is also important to know that various host computers
react differently when they receive the Break. One host
might stop the execution of a program while another might
log you off and break the communications link to the terminal. Therefore, before using the Break key or BREAKTIME
command, you should find out how the interrupt is handled
by your host.

• DIALOG

• Page
• Caps Lock
• SETUP

Pressing the Break key also unlocks the keyboard (see

• CLEAR
• LOCAL
• CANCEL
• COpy

Page

Kybd Lock earlier in this section).

When you press the Page key, the following items are
erased:

COMMAND KEYS
There are six command keys (Figure 2-13) that perform
special functions or put the terminal into a particular mode
of operation. These keys cannot be programmed to do any
other function. Their purpose is to allow you to easily access
frequently used terminal features.

• Graphics in the current view that are not part of a graphics segment (a graphics segment is a picture or part of a
picture that can be manipulated by terminal commands).
• Text that is not part of a graphics segment and not in the
dialog area.

4665.17

Figure 2-12. The Break Key.

2-14

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

The following are erased momentarily and then redrawn
when you press the Page key:

.;) 4010 Series Graphics Input (GIN) mode is terminated.
Because of these actions, it is generally best not to press
Page while a program is running with the dialog area disabled. (These actions do not take place if the dialog area is
enabled.)

o Segments visible in the current view.
o The framing box.
o Border around a viewport.
A segment is permanently erased by being deleted from the
terminal's memory. A segment can also be made invisible
(not erased from the terminal's memory, but not visible on
the screen). After a segment has been deleted, you may still
need to press Page to erase its image from the screen,
depending upon how the terminal's FIXUP parameter is set
(see Section 6).
If the dialog area is not enabled, the following actions occur
when you press Page:
o The cursor returns to the home position (the upper-left
corner of the screen).
o The terminal goes into alpha mode (that is, it interprets
all incoming data as alphanumeric data, not graphic
data).

Caps lock
The Caps Lock key is similar to the Shift Lock key on a
typewriter.
When you press Caps Lock, the red light in the key comes
on and alphabetic characters are transmitted in upper case.
The Caps Lock does not cause the uppercase version of
numeric, command, or function keys to be transmitted.
Especially useful on host systems that do not accept lowercase alphabetic characters, Caps Lock allows you to easily
send only uppercase alphabetic characters to the host, but
still allows you to conveniently send numeric characters
rather than special symbols.

CAPS
LOCK

4665·18

Figure 2-13. The Command Keys.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-15

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

SETUP
When you press the SET UP key, the light in the key turns
on and the terminal enters Setup mode. (If the dialog area is
enabled, the light in the DIALOG key also turns on. See the
discussion of the dialog area later in this section.) With the
terminal in Setup mode, you can enter English-like commands (called setup commands) directly to the terminal. You
can also enter escape sequence commands that would
normally be sent from the host.
Setup commands allow you to establish the terminal's operating environment and to use peripherals attached to the
terminal. Setup commands are used for such things as
establishing communication rates, inquiring about the terminal's status, determining what kinds of errors the terminal
should display, and programming special meanings
(macros) into keys.
The results of many setup commands are stored in setup
memory. Specifications stored in setup memory are remembered even if the terminal is turned off or unplugged.
Section 6 describes Setup mode and all of the setup
commands.

DIALOG
Part of the screen can be used to display your conversations (dialog) with the terminal and the host computer. This
portion of the screen is called the dialog area. The DIALOG
key can be used to make the dialog area visible or invisible.

However, the dialog area interacts with other command
settings. A more complete discussion of the dialog area is
therefore given here.
The text that can be written in the dialog area includes:
• The terminal's error messages.
• Commands entered in Setup mode.
• Text entered in Local mode (most commands entered in
Local mode are not echoed on the screen).
• Non-graphics (alpha) text included in a graphics
program.
• Host-generated messages, such as prompts, warnings,
and error messages.
• Normal terminal/host communications.
See the explanation of the CLEAR key later in this section
for details on how to clear text from the dialog area.
Enabling the Dialog Area. Text is directed to the dialog area
when the dialog area is enabled. When the dialog area is
disabled, text is displayed with graphics. The DAENABLE
command is used to enable or disable the dialog area. As
illustrated in Figure 2-14, if the dialog area is enabled, the
text is directed to the dialog buffer. The dialog buffer can be
thought of as a scroll, part of which is displayed at a specified screen location.
Whether the dialog area is enabled is stored in setup memory. For example, if you enable the dialog area and turn the
terminal off, it will be enabled the next time you turn the
terminal on.

Figure 2-14. Enabling the Dialog Area.

2-16

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

4010 Compatibility. The terminal can distinguish between
text that is part of the graphics (graphics text) from text that
is not part of graphics (alpha text). Graphics text, such as
titles and labels, is displayed with the graphics. Alpha text is
sent to the dialog area. Programs written for 4010 Series
and 4020 Series Tektronix terminals can also be run on this
terminal, but special consideration must be made for text
since those terminals do not have a dialog area.
For example, you can run a program that was originally
written for a 401 0 terminal. If the program includes text
(such as a title or labels) and the dialog area is active, the
terminal will strip the title and labels out of the picture and
display the text in the dialog area.
When the dialog area is disabled, the terminal does not
intercept text and display it in the dialog area. The DAENABLE command allows a 401 O-style program with text to
execute on this terminal just as on a 4010 Series terminal.
Dialog Area Visibility. Even if the dialog area is enabled, it
must also be made visible so you can see the text that is
sent to it. If the dialog area is enabled but not visible, dialog
is written in the dialog area but neither the text nor the cursor is visible.
The DIALOG key is used to make the dialog area visible or
not visible. When the red light in the key is off, the dialog
area is not visible. (You can also use a setup command
called DAVIS to make the area visible or not visible see Section 6.)
If the dialog area is enabled when you turn on the terminal,
the light in the DIALOG key turns on, the dialog area is
visible, and the cursor is displayed in the dialog area. If the
dialog area is not enabled when you turn on the terminal,
the dialog area is not visible and the cursor appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen.

When the dialog area is visible, you can use the top
thumbwheel (Figure 2-9) to move (scroll) through the dialog
area to observe its entire contents. As you scroll, you are
moving the window, shown in Figure 2-14, so that different
lines in the dialog area are visible. The window is that portion of the scroll that can be seen in the dialog area. The
cursor stays on the line below the last line of dialog. This
assures you that information sent to the dialog area while
you are examining it does not overwrite information that is
already there.
If you want to scroll quickly to the beginning or end of the
terminal's dialog window, "flick" the top thumbwheel either
up or down. Draw your index or middle finger down the
center of the top thumbwheel, with a quick sharp stroke; this
jumps you to the bottom of the dialog window. To jump to the
top of the dialog window, flick your finger across the top
thumbwheel in the other direction, away from you.
Line Length. The maximum length of each line in the dialog
area is specified by the DACHARS setup command. The
factory default is 80.
Dialog Area Writing fulode. The DAMODE setup command
specifies whether a character in the dialog area is overwritten or erased when you backspace the cursor, and whether
a new space or underscore character will replace a character already displayed at that location. The factory default is
Replace. Replace means that when the dialog area is
enabled and visible and you backspace over a character, it
is erased. The other setting is Overstrike. Overstrike means
that when the dialog area is enabled and visible, backspacing over a character leaves the character unaltered. Entering a space or underscore character leaves the old
character at that location.
A special character delete key is used to backspace in Setup
mode. See the EDITCHARS command in Section 6.

Dialog Buffer. Text sent to the dialog area is stored in a
special area of terminal memory called the dialog buffer.
The DABUFFER command allocates a certain amount of
the terminal's memory for the dialog buffer. The factory
default is 34 lines.

Dialog Area Position. You can position the dialog area
anywhere on the screen. The DAPOSITION command
specifies the location of the lower-left corner of the dialog
area. The terminal pOSitions the last visible line of the dialog
area as close as possible to that location.

When the dialog buffer is full, the first line is deleted so
another line of dialog can be added to the end.
The maximum length of each line is specified by the
DACHARS command.
Visible Portion of the Dialog Area. It is not usually necessary or desirable to have the entire dialog buffer visible. The

41158 OPERATORS

DALINES setup command specifies the number of visible
lines in the dialog buffer. The factory default is five lines.

For example, the factory default position is the lower-left
corner of the screen (0,0). This means that the dialog area is
located so that the last visible line (the fifth line, by factory
default) begins at the lower-left corner of the screen.

REV, JAN 1984

2-17

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

CLEAR

CANCEL

To erase the dialog area, press the SHIFT and DIALOG!
CLEAR keys at the same time. This clears all text from the
dialog buffer. The result is that the dialog area is erased. It
does not erase any graphics on the screen or affect whether
or not the dialog area is visible.

Press the Shift and LOCAL keys at the same time to initiate
a CANCEL operation. A CANCEL operation:
• Halts all disk, host, and 3PPI file copy operations except
spooling (Section 6).
• Terminates segment operations.
• Cancels Bypass mode (BYPASSCANCEL in Section 6).

LOCAL

• Terminates Graphics Input (GIN) mode (Section 4).
When you press LOCAL, the red light in the key turns on
and the terminal enters Local mode. If the terminal is
already in Local mode, pressing the keys turns the light off
and terminates Local mode.

• Unlocks the keyboard (LOCKKEYBOARD in Section 6).

In Local mode, communications to and from the host computer are temporarily suspended. Everything typed at the
keyboard is interpreted by the terminal as if it came from the
host. Information or data received from the computer is not
processed; it is put into a queue and processed when you
exit from Local mode.
Figure 2-15 illustrates the flow of communications. Notice
that when the terminal is in Local mode, data transmission
is routed back to the terminal instead of being sent to the
host.
In Local mode, you can enter commands (escape
sequences) from the keyboard in the same format that a
host uses and the terminal executes them as if they came
from the host.

If a file transfer is cancelled (COPY in Section 6), the file is
closed. All information in that file operation up to the time of
the CANCEL command is preserved.

HARDCOPY
The HARD COPY key is used to make hard copies of the
screen display when a compatible copier is attached to the
terminal. To ensure good quality copies, allow the copier to
warm up for a few minutes before copies are made.
The exact length of time it takes to make a hard copy of the
screen depends on the type of hard copy unit, but a typical
time is about ten seconds. Data sent to the terminal during a
hard copy operation is stored in the terminal's input queue
until the copy is finished. Data transfer operations and other
non-display terminal functions continue undisturbed during
a hard copy operation.

Ifboth Setup and Local modes are active, Setup takes
priority.

HOST
COMPUTER

Figure 2-15. Communication Flow in Local Mode.

2-18

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

The standard terminal can make black and white copies of
the screen on a TEKTRONIX 4634 or 4632 Hard Copy Unit
with Option 15. The 4634 and 4632 make gray-scale copies
with each color mapped to a particular gray level. (See the
CMAP command in Section 6 for details on this mapping.)
See Section 3 for details on using a monochrome copier.
Pressing the HARD COPY button copies the display just as
it appears on the screen (with black copying to black, etc.).
Pressing Shift-HARD COPY (hold down the Shift key while
you press the HARD COPY button) produces a reverse video
image, with black copying to white and vice versa. This
gives dark letters on white copy paper, similar to typewriter
copy. The mapping of colors to gray levels is unaffected.
You can also copy the screen by pressing the COpy button
on the hard copy unit.
With Option 09, the 4691 Color Graphics Copier Interface,
installed and a 4691 copier attached to the terminal, you
can make color hard copies of the screen by pressing the
HARD COPY key. See the HC command descriptions in
Section 6 (HCCOPIES, HCINTERFACE, etc.) and Section 3
for details on making color hard copies.

fUNCTION KEYS
Most of the terminal's keys are programmable. This means
that you can define the character or character string that is
transmitted when you press a particular key. The character
string or individual character assigned to a key is called a
macro.
The eight programmable function keys (Figure 2-16) transmit nothing unless they are programmed. The alphanumeric
and control keys have characters assigned to them, but
they can be assigned a macro instead.
Most keys can have two macros (shifted and unshifted).
Keys that do not have a shifted version can have just one
macro. A few keys are reserved for specific commands and
cannot be programmed. Figure 2-17 shows the keys that
are not programmable and keys that have no shifted
version.
The DEFINE setup command (see Section 6) is used to
program a macro into a key. When you press a key that has
a macro programmed into it, the key is expanded to mean
that macro.

PROGRAMMABLE

FUNCTI~

Figure 2-16. Programmable Function Keys.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-19

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

When the terminal is reset or turned off, macros are deleted
from the terminal's memory. The DEFINE command can
also be used to delete a macro and return a key to its original meaning.

VIEWING KEYS
The terminal's four viewing keys (Figure 2-18) allow you to
examine a graphics display stored in segments in more
detail.

The PAN and ZOOM keys put the terminal into Framing
mode. There are several additional functions, as indicated
by the labels on the other viewing keys: VIEW, OVERVIEW,
NORMAL, NEXT VIEW, RESTORE, and BORDER.
The terminal's display can be divided into as many as 64
separate views. When there is more than one view, graphics actions (such as Graphics Input and Framing mode) take
place in the view that is currently active. The current view
can be selected by program control or by pressing the terminal's NEXT VIEW key.
NOTE

The viewing keys are disabled automatically in
Setup mode. If the bell rings when you press any of
the viewing keys, they have been disabled by the
terminal's lock-vie wing-keys command. To unlock
the viewing keys, put the terminal into Setup mode
and enter the following escape sequence command:
EcRJ

0 cR

Escape sequence commands are explained in detail
in the 4110 Series Command Reference Manual,
and listed in Appendix C of this manual.
Appendix F has an example of how to use the viewing keys.
To better understand the function of all the keys, do the
examples in Appendix F.

Figure 2-18. The Viewing Keys.

COMMAND KEYS

Page

Ctrl

Caps
Lock

Break

Shift

4665-22

Figure 2-17. Non-Programmable Keys.

2-20

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

framing Mode
When you press the ZOOM or PAN keys, the terminal enters
Framing mode. In Framing mode, aframing box appears at
the edges of the currently active viewport. You can change
the location or shape of the framing box with the thumbwheels. The box frames that portion of the view you want to
see in more detail.
To view a small portion of the image currently displayed, use
ZOOM. You can use the PAN key to move the framing box
across or up and down the current view. These keys are
discussed in detail under the heading ZOOM and PAN.
The terminal's screen resolution is 1280 x 1024 pixels,
although the terminal's internal coordinate space can
address over 4 billion x 4 billion points along each coordinate axis. Because of this high internal data resolution, you
can zoom in on a small portion of graphics and then display
that portion without losing detail or sharpness.

VIEW
The VIEW key is used to update the view defined by the
framing box that was formed by the PAN and ZOOM keys.
When you have positioned the framing box outline to where
you want it, press the VIEW key to update the display. The
viewport is erased and the portion of the window that was
within the framing box is displayed in the new viewport. The
framing box again appears at the edge of the viewport.
If you press Ctrl and VIEW at the same time, the view
described by the framing box is displayed in the viewport
with the previous view. However, the framing box remains
active in the current viewport.
For example, you might have two viewports defined on the
screen, the larger of the two containing a picture. You can
zoom into a small portion of the picture and press Ctrl-VIEW
keys. The specified detailed view is displayed in the smaller
viewport. This provides a detailed view as specified, but
also leaves an overview of the larger picture visible. The
framing box continues to be active in the current (larger)
viewport.

ZOOM and PAN
Pressing either the ZOOM or PAN keys makes that function
active. The light in the key turns on to indicate that you are
in Framing mode with the pan or zoom function selected.
When the zoom function is active, the lower-left and upperright corners of a rectangle appear in the framing box. The
framing box represents the proposed new view (window).

4115B OPERATORS

If you press ZOOM and rotate the top thumbwheel up and
the bottom thumbwheel to the right, the height and width of
the framing box increases (zooms out). If you rotate the
thumbwheels in the opposite direction, the height and width
of the framing box decreases (zooms in). In both cases, the
framing box maintains its current aspect ratio.
You can zoom in to 1/16th the size of the current window, or
pan to the edge of the terminal space. If you want to zoom in
more than that, press the VIEW key and then zoom in on
that view.
If you press the PAN key, the framing box is replaced by a
crosshair. The thumbwheels move the box right, left, up, or
down, in the current view.
You can pan until the edge of the framing box reaches the
edge of the terminal space (4096 x 4096) or until only VB of
the framing box is still in the current view, whichever happens first. If you have not reached the edge of the viewport
and you want to pan more, press the VIEW key to update
the current view and pan across that view until you have the
view you want.
You can zoom in on a view until it is about eight times its
current size. If you want to zoom out more, press the VIEW
key to update the viewport and then zoom out on that view.
Terminate the pan or zoom function by exiting from Framing
mode or by making the opposite function (pan or zoom)
active. Exit from Framing mode by pressing the ZOOM key
when the ZOOM key light is on. Press the PAN key to exit
from the Framing mode when the PAN key light is on. The
light in the key turns off as Framing mode is terminated.
You can use both the zoom and pan functions before you
update a view. For example, you could press the ZOOM key
and zoom in, then press ZOOM again, and so on until you
have the framing box located correctly. Then press the
VIEW key.
Panning and zooming occur in the currently active viewport.
To pan or zoom in another viewport, use the NEXT VIEW
key, as explained later in this section.
To Change the Aspect Ratio. While you are in ZOOM,
press the Ctrl key and rotate a thumbwheel. This alters the
aspect ratio of the framing box. Press Ctrl while you rotate
the top thumbwheel to change the height of the box without
affecting its width.Press Ctrl while you rotate the bottom
thumbwheel to change the width of the framing box without
affecting its height. To restore the original aspect ratio,
press NORMAL.

REV, JAN 1984

2-21

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

See the explanation of the RESTORE key for information on
restoring a previous view.
Vernier Action. If you press the Shift key while you rotate
the thumbwheels, the box or crosshair changes more
slowly, which allows you to more precisely position the window. This is called vernier action. Press the Shift and Ctrl
keys to use the vernier while rotating the thumbwheels to
change the aspect ratio.

NEXT VIEW
When the display contains more than one viewport, the
terminal internally identifies each viewport with an integer
value. You can make the view with the next larger identifier
active by pressing the NEXT VIEW key.
You can make the view with the next smaller identifier active
by pressing Gtrl the same time as the NEXT VIEW key.
When a viewport becomes visible, a border around that
viewport blinks once to indicate that it is active. You can
then use the Framing mode and viewing key functions in
that viewport.

OVERVIEW
When you press the OVERVIEW key (the Shift and PAN
keys at the same time) the currently defi ned full overview
window is made visible. If the pan or zoom function is
active, it remains active and the framing box is visible.

RESTORE

If you press the Crtl and OVERVIEW keys (Ctrl-Shift-PAN) at
the same time, the currently defined partial overview window is displayed. (Notice that this changes the aspect ratio
from its normal 5:4 ratio to a 1:1 ratio.) If the pan or zoom
function is active, it remains active and the framing box is
still visible (in a 5:4 aspect ratio - even though the display
uses a 1:1 ratio). To restore the normal view and aspect
ratio, press the OVERVIEW key again.
The escape command Set-Overview-Window defines the
currentfull and partial overview windows. The overview
window can be set to be the entire adressable coordinate
space; the default overview window is the window 0,0 to
4095,4095. (See the 4110 Series Command Reference

The terminal remembers the last three views for each viewport. To restore the most recent view, press the RESTORE
key. To restore the second most recent view, press
RESTORE again. Press it a third time to restore the third
most recent view.
If you press RESTORE a fourth time, the terminal restores
the view as it was before you altered it with a viewing function. This original version of the view is not replaced when
you press the VIEW key, as the three most recent views are.
This means that you are always able to return to its original
condition.
If you press RESTORE a fifth time, you see the most recent
view again. If you press it a sixth time, you see the second
most recent view, and so on.

Manual.)

NORMAL
As mentioned earlier, you can change the aspect ratio of the
framing box by pressing the Gtrl key while rotating a
thumbwheel.
If you then press the VIEW key, the view is updated with the
same aspect ratio as the framing box. To cause the framing
box to return to its normal (5:4) aspect ratio, press the
NORMAL key (Shift and ZOOM keys at the same time).

You can immediately restore the original view (as it was
before you altered it with a viewing function) by pressing
Gtrl and RESTORE at the same time.
Since the three most recent views are saved, this list of
views changes every time you press the VIEW key.
For example, when you press the VIEW key:
• The third most recent view is deleted.
• The second most recent view becomes the third most
recent.
• The most recent view becomes the second most recent.
• The current view becomes the most recent.
• The contents of the framing box becomes the current
view.

(

2-22

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

BORDER

Check with a qualified person concerning proper cabling
and installation if your cables are not connected.

You can cause the terminal to draw a border around the
current viewport by pressing the BORDER key. If that viewport already has a border, pressing the key deletes the
border.

The M4115B Computer Display Terminal comes with 10-foot
display cables and a 9-foot keyboard cable so that you can
position the display and keyboard a few feet away from the
electronics module.

CONNECTORS

Connectors for your terminal are located on the display
unit's rear panel and on the rear panel of the 41158 pedestal or the M4115B electronics module. Figure 2-19 shows
connectors on the rear panel of the display. Figure 2-20
shows the layout of standard and optional connectors on
the 4115B pedestal; Figure 2-21 shows the layout of standard and optional connectors on the M41158 electronics
module.

If you move the electronics module even slightly,
make sure that the floppy or hard disk drives are
not active (that is, make sure there is no read or
write operation in progress). If you accidentally
bump the module while the drives are active, you
may damage the drives and also the disks, resulting
in lost data. To prevent thisfrom happening, turn
off the module before moving it. Always turn off
the power when disconnecting any cables.

NOTE

Figures 2-20 and 2-21 show a typical arrangement
of standard and optional connectors on the 4II5B
pedestal and M4II5B electronics module. The
number and location of connectors depends on the
options that are installed in your terminal.

4115BOPERATORS

If you decide to reposition the M4115B and you disconnect
any cables, be sure to reconnect the cables correctly, or
contact a qualified person to reconnect the cables.

REV. JAN 1984

2-23

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD
/"

DISPLAY UNIT CONNECTORS
These connectors are located on the rear of the display unit
(Figure 2-19):
• RED, GREEN, BLUE connectors. These connectors
accept color signals from the pedestal or the electronics
module (via BNC cables) and route those signals to the
proper circuitry in the display unit.

• Mains fuse. This is the primary fuse for the display unit.
Note that the pedestal and the electronics module have
their own fuses. See the following caution! To remove a
bad fuse, unscrew the cover on the fuse holder with a
flat-blade screwdriver; the fuse pops out when the cover
is removed.

• Display controller connector. This accepts control signals
from the pedestal or the electronics module and routes
those signals to the proper electronics in the display unit.
The controller cable plugs into this connector and is
secured with two wire clips attached to the connector.
• AC power connector. This accepts AC power from the
display unit power cord. On the 4115B, the POWER
switch on the front of the pedestal powers both the display unitandthe pedestal; on the M4115B, the POWER
switch on the front of the electronics module powers both
the display and the module.

~
If a fuse burns out, it may indicate a serious fault in
the terminal circuitry or in the AC power source.
Find and correct the problem before replacing the
fuse and turning the terminal back on! Call a qualified service technician if you do not have the appropriate training.

Figure 2-19. Connectors on the 4115Band M4115B Display.

2-24

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

RED, GREEN,BLUE
CONNECTORS

DISPLAY CONTROL
CONNECTOR ~.,?k'

"'~l~ :::~.;:g.

RS-232 CIV.24
CONNECTOR

•...
.,.'"

·U

TO HARD COPY
(MONOCHROME)

!
AC POWER ~i
:

~
~.
",',

~ MAINS FUSE

L?~

VA'?

A. Standard Connectors.

TO 4690 SERIES
COLOR COPIER
3-PORT PERIPHERAL
INTERFACE
CONNECTORS

DMA INTERFACE
(NOT SHOWN)
MASS STORAGE
INTERFACE
TABLET INTERFACE

UPPER LEFT CORNER
REMOTE
ON

LOWER LEFT CORNER

Figure 2-20. Connectors on the 4115B Pedestal.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

2-25

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Figure 2-21. Connectors on the M4115B Electronics Module.

2-26

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

PEDESTAL AND ELECTRONICS MODULE
CONNECTORS
Most of the standard and optional connectors are grouped
on small panels on the back of the 4115B pedestal or the
M4115B electronics module. The layout of these connector
panels is similar for the 4115B pedestal and the M4115B
electronics module, but the actual layout on your terminal
depends on the options installed in your terminal.
Except for the pedestal's keyboard connector, all connectors are located on the rear panel of the pedestal or the
electronics module.

o AC power connector. This connector accepts the female
end of an AC power cord and supplies power to the pedestal or electronics module. The display unit has a separate power cord, although power to the entire terminal is
controlled by the main POWER switch on the front of the
pedestal or electronics module.
o Mains fuse. This is the primary fuse for the pedestal or
electronics module. Note that the display unit and the
pedestal (or module) have separate fuses. See the preceding caution! To remove a bad fuse, unscrew the
cover on the fuse holder with a flat-blade screwdriver; the
fuse pops out when the cover is removed.

Standard Connectors

o RED, GREEN, BLUE connectors. These three connectors supply color signals (via BNC cables) to the corresponding connectors on the rear of the display unit.

Figure 2-20A shows the locations of these standard connectors on the 4115B pedestal; Figure 2-21A shows the locations of these connectors on the back of the M4115B
electronics module.

o TO DISPLAY connector. This connector supplies control
signals to the corresponding connector on the rear of the
display unit. The control cable plugs into this connector
and is secured by the two wire clips attached to the connector.

o The Keyboard Connector. On the 4115B terminal, the
keyboard connects to the front of the pedestal by a coiled
cable; on the M4115B terminal, the keyboard connects
to the rear of the electronics module by a non-coiled
9-foot cable. Figure 2-22 shows the KEYBOARD connector on both terminals. To attach the cable on either terminal, plug it in, and then secure it with the two screws
provided.

4115B OPERATORS

o RS-232-CN.24 connector. This connector provides RS232 communications. This is normally used to connect to
a host computer.
o TO HARD COPY connector. This connector provides
output signals to a monochrome hard copy unit.

REV, APR 1984

2-27

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

,/--

Figure 2-22. The KEYBOARD Connector.

2-28

REV, JAN 1984

CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND KEYBOARD

Optional Connectors
Figures 2-20B and 2-21 B show optional connectors on the
pedestal and the electronics module, respectively. These
connectors are present when the indicated options are
installed in the terminal.
o MASS STORAGE INTERFACE (Option 45). This provides data output to a mass storage device compatible
with Option 45.
REMOTE ON OUTPUT (Option 45). Supplies a Power
On signal to the remote mass storage device. (See Section 3 for more information.)
o 3-PORT PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Option 10). This

41158 OPERATORS

panel provides three RS-232 connectors (labeled PORT
0, PORT 1, and PORT 2) for interface with optional RS232 peripheral devices.
o TO 4690 SERIES COPIER (Option 09). This connector
provides color signals to a TEKTRONIX 4691 Color
Graphics Copier.
o TABLET INTERFACE (Option 13 or 14). The 4115B pedestal has an option panel containing three connectors for
the tablet; the M4115B electronics module has a single
tablet connector that connects to a tablet interface box.
Section 3 contains more detail on some of the options and
optional connectors.

REV, JAN 1984

2-29

~NTIRlODlllCT~ON

o Using the 4691 Color Graphics Copier

The purpose of this section is to introduce the concept of a
file and file transfers, and to show how you can use various
peripherals attached to the terminal to store and display
information. This section is introductory in nature. It contains concepts and command examples that an experienced operator may already know. For detailed information
on each of the commands discussed here, see the command descriptions in Section 6.
This section is organized as follows:

o Devices, Files and File Transfers
Introduces files, devices, and file transfers, and gives a
summary of the file transfer commands.

o Using Disk Drives
Discusses all disk drive options (42, 43, and 45).

Discusses the use of Option 09 and the 4691 Color
Graphics Copier to make color hard copies of the display.

o Using a Monochrome Hard Copy Unit
Discusses how to make black and white hard copies.

o Using a Tablet Option
Discusses Option 13/14 and the use of a graphics tablet.
Each discussion includes a physical description of the
option (if any) - the external indicators, controls, and connectors associated with the option, and any special instrument settings that may be necessary. Then a summary of
the commands included in this option or most often used
with the instruments is given. Finally, some examples of
actual command sequences to accomplish a specified task
are given. See Section 6 for an explanation of setup command syntax.

o Using the Three-Port Peripheral Interface
Discusses the 3PPI (Option 10) and those instruments
most often connected to it: plotters, printers, and tape
drives.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-1

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

FILES AND FILE TRANSFERS

FILE OPERATIONS

FILES
One of the basic units of computer information is the file. A
computer file is used in much the same way as a business
or personal file - to collect and store items of information
that are related in some way. Like business files, computer
files have names, are difficult to handle when they get too
large, sometimes need to be moved from one place to
another, and sometimes need to be thrown away altogether.
To a computer or terminal, a file is simply a stream of data
that has a beginning and an end. The beginning of a file is
marked by afile header that is automatically written when
the file is created. The end of a file is marked during file
transfer operations by an end-oj-file string. This string may
or may not be included in the file; when it is not, it must be
explicitly supplied by either the hardware or software. You
will see the end-of-file string referred to occasionally in this
manual.

The operations you may want to perform on a file depend on
the contents of the file. For example, files that contain
graphic commands to the terminal will be executed - that
is, a certain part of the terminal will read the file and execute
any terminal commands it contains.
There are a few basic types of operations that apply to all
types of files; you can transfer a file, find status information
for a file, delete a file, rename a file, and write-protect or
unprotect a file from being deleted or modified.
Of these types of operations,file transJeroperations are the
most important. Each file transfer locates a file on a specified source device and transfers it to a specified destination
device, perhaps modifying the file in some way during the
transfer. Some examples are:
• Copying a file from a disk to a plotter, translating graphic
commands that the terminal understands into graphic
commands that the plotter can understand.
• Copying a file from the host onto a disk.

Each file has a name and, on most computer systems, an
extension. In 4110 Series terminals each file is identified by
a name that is from one to eight characters long;.it may
have an extension from one to three characters long, separated from the name by a period. For example:
MAY15.DAT
VITALDAT
myfile.tx
INIT.CMD

• Saving the terminal screen contents to a disk file for later
plotting or execution.
As these examples show, there are many different
"devices." Some of them can both send and receive data (a
disk drive, for example), some can send data only, and
some are not really physical devices at all. The following is a
list of the most common "devices" that you can specify as
sources or destinations for file transfers. Note that the colon
is always the last character in a device name.

A complete description of file name conventions is given in
the File Names discussion near the beginning of Section 6.

3-2

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

€I

The following devices can be either a source or a destination device:
HO:

The host communications port (standard).

FO:

Flexible disk drive O. (Options 42, 43) This
is the default drive; if you specify a
filename without a device name, device FO:
is assumed.

F1 :
SO:-S7:
TO:-T7:
UO:-U7:
VO:-V7:
WO:-W7:
XO:-X7:
YO:-Y7:
ZO:-Z7:

Flexible disk drive 1. (Option 43)

Table 3-1
FILE TRANSFER COMMANDS
Command

Description

COPY

COPY makes a copy of a specified file, leaving the
original file intact. The copy may have a new name,
extension, or device location. Useful for moving files
or making backup copies. While a COPY is in
progress the terminal will not execute any other
commands.

LOAD

LOAD reads a file and executes any terminal
commands it contains. Useful for initializing the
terminal or redrawing graphics stored on disk.

PLOT
(Option 10)

PLOT copies the visible segments on the display to
an output device. It is specifically designed to plot
the screen contents on a 4662 or 4663 plotter.

SAVE

SAVE sends commands necessary to recreate
certain items on a destination device. These items
include macro definitions, graphic segments, and
specified parts of the screen display. A SAVEd file
can be retrieved and executed by the LOAD
command.

SPOOL

SPOOL is designed for "background" copy
operations between peripheral devices. A SPOOL
operation allows normal terminal display and host
communications to continue uninterrupted.

STOP

STOP halts a spooling operation in progress, closes
the output file and saves all information already
stored in it.

External mass storage devices (Option 45)
and hard disk drives (Options 46 and 47)'

o The Option 10 peripheral ports may be sou rces or destinations or both, depending on what type of peripheral is
attached. For example, a printer is a receive-only device,
so specifying PO: as a source is invalid if a printer is
attached to that port. Port device names are:
PO:
P1:
P2:

There are several different commands that you can use to
transfer a file, each designed for a particular purpose. A
summary of the file transfer commands is given in Table 3-1.

Port 0
Port 1
Port 2

o The "device" SC: specifies the screen contents. Specifying this as the source device allows you to transfer the
contents of the display using the same command format
as for other file transfers. SC: cannot be used as a destination. (Requires Option 09; see the COPY command
description in Section 6.)
o The "device" HC: specifies a hard copy unit as the destination device. Even though making a hard copy is not
strictly a "file transfer," this allows you to make hard
copies using the same command format as for other file
transfers. (Requires Option 09; see COPY and SPOOL
command descriptions in Section 6.)
e The "device" DM: specifies the DMA interface. Devices
DS:, SG:, PX:, and CM: specify DMA "pseudo devices"
(see the 4115B Option 3A DMA Interface Instruction

Manual).

The specific device names for an Option 45, 46, or 47 device depend on strap
settings that are set during installation.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-3

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

USING DISK DRIVES

Option 45

A disk drive is one of the most common ways to store large
quantities of information. Disks are small and relatively
inexpensive, and information can be retrieved quickly from
anywhere on a disk medium.

•
•

The terminal has five options that provide information storage on a disk media:
Option 42

OptionA3

The Mass Storage Interface. This option provides the ability to interface to one of the following external devices:

One flexible disk drive, mounted in the pedestal or electronics module. Includes the Mass
Storage Interface.
Two flexible disk drives, mounted in the pedes·
tal or electronics module. Includes the Mass
Storage Interface.

The TEKTRONIX 4926, a 10-megabyte
hard disk.
The TEKTRONIX 4926 Option 25, a
10-megabyte hard disk with duaI5Y4inch flexible disk drives.

•

The TEKTRONIX 4926 Option 26, dual
10-megabyte hard disks.

•

The TEKTRONIX 4925, duaI5Y4-inch
flexible disk drives.

Option 462

One 10-megabyte hard disk, mounted in the
pedestal or electronics module. Requires
either Option 42 or 45; cannot be used with
Option 43.

Option 472

Two 10-megabyte hard disks, mounted in the
pedestal or electronics module. Requires
either Option 42 or 45; cannot be used with
Option 43.

,~---

(

M4115Bonly.

Figure 3-1. Option 42/43 Flexible Disk Drives.

3-4

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

OPTION 42/43 DESCRIPTION

Basic Description

Option 42 provides one disk drive for 8-inch removable
flexible disk storage media and a Mass Storage Interface to
an external mass storage device (disk). Option 43 provides
two such drives; otherwise it is identical to Option 42. Figure
3-1A shows the Option 42/43 drive in the 41158 pedestal;
Figure 3-1 8 shows the drive in the drawer of the M41158
electronics module. Each drive includes a door, a door bar
with a disk drive indicator, and a write-protect switch and

light.

Each flexible disk (Figure 3-2) consists of a thin circular disk
of plastic coated with a metal oxide to hold magnetic
charges. The magnetic pattern on the disk can be altered
(written) or detected (read) by the read/write heads in the
disk drive. The disk itself is permanently enclosed in a sleeve
that protects the disk surface from dirt, scratches, and other
damage. The sleeve has openings for read/write operations, for the disk drive spindle, etc. Each disk has a front
and a back side; the disk label is on the front of the disk.

The drive on the right is always Drive O. In setup commands,
specify the right disk drive as device FO: (always include the
colon in a disk drive specification). The left disk drive, if
present, is Drive 1 (specified as F1: in setup commands).

Each disk/sleeve assembly is shipped in a protective envelope that is open on one side. This envelope covers approximately three fourths of the disk/sleeve to protect the
exposed portions of the disk.

The following discussions supply basic information on
safety and handling of flexible disks.

FRONT

3673-22

Figure 3-2. Flexible Disks.

4115B OPERATORS

REV. JAN 1984

3-5

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Inserting and Removing a Disk

~
The disk drive(s)for the M4115B terminal are
located in a drawer in the electronics module. Open
the drawer gently before removing or inserting
flexible disks. To prevent damage to the drives and
disks, do not let the drawer slam shut; close it carefully. (If the drive is reading or writing to a flexible
or hard disk and you accidentally bump the drawer,
the drive and!or disk can be damaged.) To avoid
damage, keep the drawer closed when you are not
changing disks.
To insert a disk, open the door to the drive by pressing in on
the door bar. Insert the disk, notched edge first, with the
label as shown in Figure 3-3. Slide the disk all the way in,
until it stays in; do not push so hard as to bend the disk.
Then push down on the drive door until it clicks into place.
To remove a disk, push in on the door bar. When the door
opens, the disk pops out for easy removal.

~
Do not remove a disk while the disk drive indicator
is on. The light indicates that the disk is currently in
operation. Removing a disk halts the operation in
progress, and could damage or destroy data on the
disk.

~
Always remove an ejected disk entirely from the
drive. The drive spindle mechanism can damage the
surface of a disk left partially inserted in the drive.

Handling a Disk
Flexible disks are easy to store and handle. However, it is
important to take a few simple precautions to prevent damage to the disk and to ensure the integrity of data stored on
the disk.
Figure 3-3. Inserting A Disk.

3-6

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Do not bend a disk, since the disk can crease or tear, rendering it unusable. Oil, dirt, or dust on the disk can cause
scratches or other problems when the read/write heads in
the disk drive access that disk area. Touch only the paper
sleeve that encloses the disk itself. When a disk is not in
use, keep the disk in the protective envelope to prevent
damage to exposed disk areas.
Store all disks in an area protected from dust and extreme
temperatures. Temperature range should be between
+ 50°F and + 122°F. Prolonged exposure to extreme heat
(above 122°F) or cold (below -40°F) can ruin the disk.
Before using a disk, leave it in the area of the disk drive for
at least five minutes before inserting it into the drive. This
will prevent unnecessary stresses on the disk or errors in
information access due to sudden environmental changes.
If you are storing critical data on a disk, make a backup
copy of the disk periodically (perhaps at the end of each
working day). This will protect your data in case of fire or
accidental destruction of the disk. In fact, simply for convenience and to minimize the cost of restoring lost data, backing up a disk periodically is good practice.
Each disk should last for about 3,500,000 read/write operations per track, or about 30,000 insertions, whichever
comes first. When the disk begins to wear, you will see
translucent rings around the edges of the disk surface
through the openings in the disk sleeve. You will also notice
repeated errors when you try to access portions of the disk.
When this happens, discard the worn disk and use the
backup.

Write-Protecting a Disk
There are three ways to protect information on a disk from
being accidentally deleted or overwritten by other data.
1.

When the WRITE PROTECT switch (Figure 3-1) on the
disk drive is on, the light in the switch lights up and the
entire disk in the drive is write-protected. You cannot
format the disk, delete or add files, or add information
to files on the disk. If you attempt any operation that
would change the data on the disk, an error results.
You can use the setup command PROTECT to protect
individual files on a disk. This command prevents deleting and writing to a particular file; you can still copy the
file or destroy it by reformatting the disk.

Some disks also have a write-protect notch. On an 8"
floppy disk, when the notch is exposed, you cannot
write to the disk. (The disk is write-protected.) To unprotect the disk, cover the notch with opaque tape. (The
5114" floppy disks, on the other hand, are write-protected when the notch is covered and unprotected
when the notch is exposed.)

MASS STORAGE INTERFACE DIESCRIPTION
The Mass Storage Interface (Option 45) provides the terminal with an interface to:
a The TEKTRONIX 4926 Hard Disk Drive
a The TEKTRONIX 4925 (or 4926 Option 25) Dual 51f4-lnch
Flexible Disk Drives
a The Option 46 Single Hard Disk Drive or Option 47 Dual
Hard Disk Drives (M4115B only)
Options 46/47 are internal mass storage devices; they are
built-in drive(s) in the drawer of the M4115B's electronics
module. The 4926 and 4925, on the other hand, are external
mass storage devices to the 4115B or M4115B terminals.
The 4926 and Option 46/47 Hard Disk Drives use 51f4-inch
rigid Winchester disk technology. These disks are not
removable. The closer tolerances possible with a fixed disk
permit much greater storage capacity than on removable
disks of the same size.
The 4925 Flexible Disk Drives use 5 1f4-inch removable
flexible disks. The same considerations of handling and
safety apply to these disks as to the 8-inch disks discussed
earlier.
The Option 45 panel is located on the rear of the pedestal or
electronics module (Figure 3-4). It contains two connectors.
The MASS STORAGE INTERFACE connector accepts an
MSIB cable from the storage device. The REMOTE ON
OUTPUT connector supplies a power-on signal to an external storage device, so that power is automatically applied to
the device when you power up the terminal.
If you are using Option 45 to interface the terminal to an
external device (such as a 4926 or 4925), use the REMOTE
ON OUTPUT connector to control power to the device. If
you do not connect an external device with the terminal's
REMOTE ON OUTPUT connector, be sure that you:
a Cap the device's unused remote connector with a shorting cap. (The 4926 and 4925 are supplied with a shorting
cap for this purpose.)
a Power up the connected device before you turn on the
terminal.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-7

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Figure 3-4. Option 45 Rear Panel Connectors.

3-8

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRP.NSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

If you do not cap the connector and you power up the device
first, the terminal may not recognize that an external device
is indeed connected, or the device may lock up and not
respond to instructions from the terminal or the host.

IE}(AMPLES OF USE
r-OII"matting a Dislt
NOTE

DISK DRIVE CONiMAHD SlmiHlfLD:.RV
Table 3-2 presents a summary of the setup commands that
relate to general disk drive operation. Section 6 contains
detailed descriptions of device and file name conventions
and the individual commands. In general, anytime you can
specify a disk mounted in the terminal, the command syntax
allows an Option 45 device as well (assuming the option is
installed and a storage device is attached).

Table 3-2

Command

Description

COPY

Copies a file from one device to another. (Original
is left intact.)

DELETE

Deletes a file from the disk.

DIRECTORY

Creates a directory 01 a disk or of a single file.

DISMOUNT

Instructs the terminal that a disk has been
changed.

FORMAT

Prepares a disk to store data. WARNING!!
Formatting a disk destroys all data previously
stored there.

LOAD

Reads a file from a disk into the terminal's
command processor; any terminal commands in
the file are executed.

PLOT
(Option 10)

Sends information from the screen to an output
device, encoding graphic information as escape
sequences.

PROTECT

Write-protects or unprotects individual disk files.

RENAME

Renames a file. The location and contents of the
file are unchanged.

SAVE

Saves selected information for later use by the
LOAD command.

SPOOL

Copies a file from one device to another while
allowing other terminal operations to continue.

STOP

Halts a spool operation.

USERNUM8ER

Sets a user number for file access. All disk
operations (except FORMAT) access only
information marked by the current user number.

41158 OPERATORS

Ij you plan to use a hard disk with Local Programmability, be sure to jorlllat the disk (using the /C
argument) bejore you store any data on the disk.
Read thejol/owing discussion and the description
oj FORMAT in Section 6/or more information.
Before a disk can be used to store data, it must bejorlnatted - that is, prepared to store data. Information is stored
on a disk in a certain physical arrangement involving tracks
(concentric rings) and sectors (subdivisions of tracks). During formatting, address labels are written at the beginning of
each track and each sector. Information is also written on
the disk to synchronize the action of the read/write heads
with the portion of the disk under the head, allowing the
head to find the proper location.
But most importantly for you, the operator, disk space is
conceptually organized into blocks and directory entries.
These terms do not refer to physical parts of the disk, but
how space on the disk is allocated to files that are created
and modified.
The number of directory entries is fixed for each type of
disk. Each rile requires at least one directory entry. A file
may require more than one directory entry, depending on
the file length; however, at least one is required. This means
that the number of directory entries is the maximum number
ojfiles that you can store on one disk. The number of directory entries depends on the storage capacity of the disk.
See the FORMAT command description in Section 6 for
details.
When you add information to a file, the system allocates
additional file space in predetermined sized chunks called
blocks. The size of a block depends on the disk format and
is listed whenever you do a DIRECTORY command for that
disk (or a file on that disk). Typical block sizes are 1024
bytes or 2048 bytes (characters).
Initially, when a file is created, one block is allocated to the
file. As you add information to the file, the size of the file is
increased in one-block increments to allow for the added
information. Using a block structure keeps the disk controller circuitry from having to update the file size continually,
but keeps unused space in the file to a minimum by using a
relatively small block size.

REV, APR 1984

3-9

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

This information sounds rather technical, and you do not
need to understand it to format and use a disk. But it will
help you to interpret the directory messages that appear on
the screen. See the DIRECTORY and FORMAT commands
in Section 6 for details.
With the exception of the Option 46/47 hard disks (for the
M4115B terminal only), disks are not formatted at the factory. You must therefore format a disk before using it. If you
plan to use Local Programmability on a hard disk, be sure to
format the hard disk using the IC argument (as described
below) before you begin storing data on it. Even of you have
an Option 46/47 hard disk that is already formatted, you
must format it again for compatibility with Local Programmability, before you begin using it.

~
Formatting a disk destroys all data stored on the
disk. Make sure you no longer need this data before
you format the disk.

The USERNUMBER Command
It is possible, especially on a high-volume fixed disk, that
several users will share the same disk. In such cases, it is
desirable to protect each user's data from accidental deletion by other users. For example, suppose you have a file
called MYDATA.NUM on the disk in device SO:. If another
user of that disk decides to delete or create a file with the
same name, your file could be destroyed.
To avoid such problems, you can specify a user number for
each user of the disk. Whenever a file is created on that
device, the file is marked with the current user number.
Most disk operations access only files marked with the
current user number. For example, when you give a
DIRECTORY command, only files marked with the current
user number are listed.
The terminal powers up with the user number set to zero.
When you begin a work session, simply set the correct user
number. For example, if your user number is 9, give the
following command at the start of your work session:
USERNUMBER 9

To format a disk, insert the disk in the appropriate disk drive
(for removable disks) and enter the FORMAT command.
The simplest version of the command simply formats the
disk in a fashion determined by the physical size and type of
the disk. For example:

Then COPY, DELETE, DIRECTORY, and similar commands
will only access files marked with your user number, and
any files created will be so marked.

Changing a Disk

FORMATFO:

NOTE

To format a 10-megabyte hard disk to conform with the data
format required by Local Programmability, include the string
"/C" after the device name. For example:

Always use the DISMOUNT command before
inserting a new disk in aflexibledrive. If you don't
use DISMOUNT, a DIRECTORY or a read operation of that disk may result in inaccurate entry and
block information.

FORMAT SO:/C

Finally, it is possible that certain tracks on a hard disk are
known to be unreliable. (This information may be included
with the disk when it is shipped from the manufacturer.) In
that case you can format the disk to exclude those tracks
from use by including up to five strings of the form "/track"
in the device name, where "track" is a track number. For
example, suppose you know that tracks 23, 29, and 37 are
"bad." If the disk is already in use and if it is necessary,
make a backup copy of the data on the disk. Then format
the disk with the command:

When you change a new disk in a floppy drive (such as a
4925 or Option 42/43 drive), you must notify the terminal
with the DISMOUNT command. This instructs the terminal
to scan the new disk for allocation and block information (for
example, for the amount of free space and for bad track
numbers) before accessing the disk.
This command:
DISMOUNT FO:

FORMAT SO:/23/29/37

notifies the terminal that the disk in drive FO: has been
replaced.

This will prevent these tracks from being accessed, while
allowing the r.est of the disk to be used normally.

3-10

REV. APR 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Disk Directories

Finally, you can ask for the directory of a specific file by
including the filename in the source device:

One of the first things you may want to know about a disk is
what information - what files - it contains. Simply give a
DIRECTORY command with the appropriate device name;
for example:
DIRECTORY FO:

This command prints a directory of the disk in drive 0 on the
terminal screen. It also lists how many blocks on the disk
have been used and how many are free (unused), how
many directory entries are used and how many are free, and
the disk block size.
If you want, you can output the directory to some other
device than the terminal screen. Just include the keyword
to, followed by a destination device. For example, the following command sends a directory of the disk in drive 0 to
an output device (say a printer) attached to peripheral port 0
(Option 10):

DIRECTORY FO:TESTDATA.NUM

This command lists directory information for the file called
TESTDATA.NUM on the screen. This information includes
the length of the file in blocks and its write-protect status. If
you want to copy a file to a disk but suspect there may not
be enough space on the disk, just do a directory of the file
and of the disk to check whether there is sufficient room.
As with all file commands, only files marked with the current
user number are listed. The entry and block information,
however, refers to the entire disk.
Figure 3-5 shows a sample disk directory and a sample
directory of an individual file.

DIRECTORY FO: to PO:

To use this form of the DIRECTORY command, you must
have an output device attached to Port 0, and Port 0 must
be properly configured for the output device. See Using the
Three-Port Peripheral Interface discussion later in this
section.
You can also save the directory by creating a file and storing
it there; for example:
DIRECTORY FO: to FO:FODIRECT

DRIVE FO:
-NAME
PRACTICE
HAVE
GOOD
NEWDA TA
INITIAL

USER NUMBER
EXE
A
DAY
DAT
CMD

-ENTRIES USED:
-ENTRIES FREE:
-BLOCKS USED:
-BLOCKS FREE:
-BLOCK SIZE:

PROTECT
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES

36
284

218
2048

This command creates a directory of the disk in drive 0 and
stores it in a file called FODIRECT on the same disk.
(Remember that filenames must be no more than eight
characters long.) Note that the source device and destination device are the same in this command.

USER NUMBER
DRIVE FO:
BLOCKS
-NAME
PRACTICE EXE
32
-ENTRIES USED:
-ENTRIES FREE:
-BLOCKS USED:
-BLOCKS FREE:
-BLOCK SIZE:

PROTECT
YES

6
314
32
276
2048

4665'27A

Figure 3-5. Sample Directories.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-11

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Changing a File Name

Protecting a File

Sometimes you may want to change the name of a file,
perhaps to use the old name for another file or because the
status of the file has changed. To change a file name, use
the RENAME command.

Earlier in this discussion you learned how to protect an
entire disk from being changed by using the WRITE PROTECT switch on the disk drive. Sometimes you may want to
protect a particular file from being accidentally deleted or
written to, while allowing access to other files on the disk. To
protect or un protect a single file, use the PROTECT command with the filename and one of the keywords yes or no.
For example, to write-protect a file called VITAL. OAT on the
disk in drive 0, enter either of the following:

For example, suppose you have been working on a file of
tentative information called EXPER4.TMP. This file is on the
disk in drive 0 and contains information on seismic tremors
from Experiment #4. It has an extension of TMP since it is a
"temporary" file. Now the experiment is complete and you
wish to mark this file for statistical analysis. One way to do
this is to rename the file:

PROTECT FO:VITAL.DAT yes
PROTECT FO:VITAL.DAT

The keyword yes is optional. To unprotect this file so you
can write new information in it or delete it, enter the command with the keyword no, like this:

RENAME EXPER4. TMP TO QUAKE-37.DAT

Drive 0 is the default device, so you need not specify the
device in this command.

PROTECT FO:VITAL.DAT no

Deleting a File

Transferring Disk Files

When you no longer want to keep the information in a file,
you can delete the entire file with the DELETE command.

COpy With Disk Files

Deleting a file destroys all in/ormation in the file.
Be sure that you no longer need in/ormation in the
file be/ore you delete it.
Only files marked with the current user number will be
deleted. You must specify both the file name and the extension for the file you want deleted. For example, to delete a
file on device FO: called OLDDATA.PDQ enter the following:
DELETE FO:OLDDATA.PDQ

This command would not delete the following:

As Table 3-1 indicates, each file transfer command is
designed for a particular purpose. In this discussion, several examples of transfers to or from a disk are given.

One of the most useful commands is the COPY command.
It provides a general file transfer capability. For example, to
copy a file from one disk location to another, just give the
COPY command with the appropriate source and
destination:
COPY FO:NEWDATA.DAT TO 51 :DATA37.DAT

Note that you can change the file name when you copy it,
and the old file is left intact. Here, the file NEWDATA.DAT is
still on the disk in drive 0, and remains there until you delete
it. Note also that FO: is the default device, so you could
shorten this command to:

OLDDATA
OLDDATA.PDX
OLDDATA.PDQ marked with a different user number
OLDDATA.PDQ on another device

3-12

COPY NEWDATA.DAT TO 51 :DATA37.DAT

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

The destination disk and the source disk can be the same
disk, as long as the file names do not conflict. For example,
you cannot perform the following file copy:
COPY FO:RESULTS TO FO:RESULTS

However, you can do the following:

transferred.) The line 1**1 is the end-of-file string; this tells
the terminal that the COPY operation into INITCMD is complete. The terminal ends the copy operation and closes the
disk file. The next EOFSTRING command resets the end-offile string to the null string; this allows the bit pattern that
defines the string 1**/ to be used for other purposes (perhaps as encoded graphic coordinates or integer parameters
for some terminal command).

COPY FO:RESULTS TO FO:RESULTS.SAV

or
COPY FO:RESULTS TO PERM DATA

COPYing To and From a Host. The COPY command can be
used to transfer files between the host computer and a
device attached to the terminal. One use would be to copy
an initialization file from the host to a disk file; this file would
later be LOADed to the terminal to initialize it for a given
applications task. For example:
EOFSTRING "f**f"
COPY HO: to FO:INIT.CMD

}

One way to arrange the proper sequence of events is as
follows:
1.

Exit Setup mode and enter the host command to begin
sending data, but leave out the host's end-of-command
character (typically a Carriage Return).

Enter Setup mode.

Enter the COPY command with the desired destination
device.

Exit Setup mode. (The SET UP light stays on because
the COPY command is still being executed.)

Enter the host's end-of-command character. (If your
host uses remote echo, this causes the end-of-command character to be the first character in the data
stream.)

From host
or keyboard

DEFINE < macro definition>
DEFINE < macro definition>

BAUD RATE < proper baud rates>
PARITY < proper parity setting>

If the source device is the host (HO:), you must begin the
data transmission before entering the COpy command.
Once you enter the COPY command the terminal waits for a
data stream from the host until it receives an end-of-file
string or until the CANCEL key is pressed.

From host

(other initialization commands)

f**f (the end-ot-file string)
EOFSTRING

From host
or keyboard

This is a "model" of a copy from the host; an initialization
file called INITCMD is created on the disk in drive 0, and
various terminal commands are copied into it. (Note however that commands from the host would be sent using
escape sequence syntax.)
The first EOFSTRING command sets the end-of-file string
to /**/. The COPY command instructs the terminal to copy
incoming data from the host port to a file called INITCMD on
the disk in drive O. The DEFINE commands program
selected keys with macro definitions. The BAUDRATE command sets the data transmission rates to use. (These may
vary with the application; a program that involves text editing would not need to transmit data as fast as an interactive
data analysis program in which large amounts of data were

41158 OPERATORS

Another way to do this is to program the host so that there is
a delay between the time it receives the end-of-command
character and the time it begins sending data. Make this
delay long enough so that you have enough time after you
enter the host send-data command to put the terminal in
Setup mode, enter the COPY command, and leave Setup
mode. The sequence would then be:
1.

Exit Setup mode (if necessary) and enter the send-data
command to the host.

While the host delays, enter Setup mode and type in
the COPY command with HO: as the source and the
appropriate destination.

Exit Setup mode. When the host delay is over, it will
begin sending data to the terminal, which is now ready
to receive it.

REV, JAN 1984

3-13

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

If the host is the destination device (you are copying from
the terminal or some peripheral attached to the terminal to
the host), you must likewise make sure that the host is ready
to receive data before the COpy command is entered.
Otherwise data will be lost. Procedures for this vary with the
host.

The SAVE Command With Disk Files
The SAVE command allows you to save macro definitions or
graphic segments as escape-sequence commands. Later
you can read this file and execute the escape sequences in
it with the LOAD command.
The following examples show how this command might be
used.

The SPOOL Command

SAVE SEG 1 TO FO:SEGMENT1
Saves graphic segment number 1 as a series of escape·
sequence commands in the disk file named SEGMENT1.

One disadvantage to the COPY command is that the terminal cannot perform any other functions while the COPY
operation is in progress. This can be inconvenient when the
destination device is relatively slow. For example, you can
copy a text file from the host computer to a printer attached
to peripheral port 0 with the following command:

SAVE MAC 128 TO FO:MACRO.65
Saves macro definition number 128 {associated with Function
Key 1} as a series of escape·sequence commands in a disk file
named MACRO.65.

COPY HO: TO PO:

However, the terminal cannot perform any other functions
until the printout is completed, which may take several
minutes. Another example would be making a color hard
copy of the screen display. Since current color copier technology outputs data at a much slower rate than the terminal,
time is lost when the terminal could be working on other
tasks.
The SPOOL command allows you to perform "background"
transfers of information from a disk file. The idea is first to
COPY the information to a disk file (if necessary) since this
is a relatively fast operation. Then use the SPOOL command to transfer the disk file to the output device, leaving
the terminal free to do other tasks. For example, to copy a
text file from the host to a printer, replace the single command COpy HO: TO PO: by the two commands:
COpy HO: TO FO:TEMPFILE.TX

(Host-to-disk copy executes rapidly)
SPOOL FO:TEMPFILE. TX TO PO:

This allows the terminal to proceed to other tasks as soon as
the copy into the disk file from the host is complete. Data is
"spooled" from the disk file to the printer without tying up
the terminal.

SAVE SEG -1 TO SEGMENTS
Saves all graphic segment definitions as series of escapesequence commands in a disk file named SEGMENTS.

SAVE can be used to send information to other destinations
than disk files. For example:
SAVE SEG 3 TO po:

If a plotter is connected to Port 0, this will cause graphic
segment 3 to be drawn on the plotter. (The port and plotter
must be properly configured; see the Using A Plotter discussion later in this section. Also see the SPOOL
discussion.)

The LOAD Command With Disk Files
The LOAD command sends a file to the terminal's command processor, which executes the file just as if these
commands had been sent from the host. Common uses for
LOAD are to recreate graphic displays or to initialize the
terminal for some applications program from the host (set
baud rates, key definitions, etc.). For example, to execute
the sample file INIT.CMD created in the COPY discussion
earlier, just enter:
LOAD INIT.CMD

A SPOOL operation in progress can be halted, if necessary,
by entering the STOP command. If the output is a file, the
file is closed and any information already spooled is saved.
SPOOL can also be used in place of a PLOT command, for
the same reason given for COPY: to avoid tying up all terminal functions during output to a a relatively slow device. See
Using A Plotter later in this section.

Since the file is on device FO:, the default device, no device
name is needed.
Another application involves storage and retrieval of graphics. Suppose a file named MODEL32.DAT is stored on the
disk in drive o. The following command will read the file,
causing graphics commands to be executed by the terminal
and the graphics information in the file to be displayed:
LOAD FO:MODEL32.DAT

3-14

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

I!JS~NG

THlE THRElE-PORT

PlER~IPHlERAl ~NTlERfAClE
Option 10, the Three-Port Peripheral Interface, provides
RS232 communications support. The specific TEKTRONIX
products supported by the 3PPI (Three-Port Peripheral
Interface) are:

The 3PPI supports any RS232 device using its PPORT
driver, which simply passes data through the port without
any formatting. To set up Port 0 with the general PPORT
driver, give the following command:
PASSIGN po: PPORT

You can format output to the 3PPI for specific Tektronix
devices with the setup command PASSIGN. For example,
you can connect a 4663 plotter to Port 0, and configure the
port with the following command:

o The 4662 Interactive Digital Plotter
o The 4663 Interactive Digital Plotter
o The 4643 Matrix Printer
o The 4923 Option 01 Digital Cartridge Tape Drive

PASSIGN po: 4663/T

The Option 10 rear panel connector (Figure 3-6) contains
three RS232 connectors, labeled PORT 0, PORT 1, and
PORT 2.
The 3PPI uses device drivers to support specific devices
attached to one of the peripheral ports. A device driver is a
program that interfaces the terminal with a specific device
attached to the port. For example, some devices may
require certain characters as part of their communications
protocol; a device driver would make sure that these characters are present when required.

41158 OPERATORS

This command assigns the 4663 device driver to Port 0; it
also instructs the driver to translate terminal commands
into 4663 commands in data sent to the plotter. See the
PASSIGN command description in Section 6 for details.
You can also use various setup commands to assign communications parameters to a peripheral port, much as you
assign these parameters to the host port. Just as with the
host, these parameters must be set to the values required
by the device attached to the port, or communications will
be garbled. The various port configuration commands are
summarized under the following heading.

REV, JAN 1984

3-15

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

/'-'

Figure 3-6. Three-Port Peripheral Interface Panel.

3-16

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

COMMAND SUMMARY
Table 3-3 summarizes the commands used with the 3PPI.
Each of these commands is discussed in detail in Section 6
of this manual. However, refer to the 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual for the basic concepts of port communications.

CONNECTiNG THE PLOTTER
TO THE TERMiNAL
When using a TEKTRONIX 4662 or 4663 Interactive Digital
Plotter, connect the plotter's "modem" connector to one of
the terminal's three RS-232 peripheral ports.

Table 3-3

NOTE

THREE-PORT PERIPHERAlll'.lTERU=AC;::
COMMAND SW\.IiMARV
Command

Description

PASSIGN

Assigns a device driver to a specified port.

Do not connect the plotter between the terminal's
host port and the host compute!; Although Ihe
plotter is designed 10 run in this conjiguration, the
terminal design assumes that the plotter is connected to one of the RS-232 peripheral ports.

PBAUD

Sets the baud rate for a specified port.

PBITS

Sets the number of stop bits and data bits for a
specified port.

PCOPY

Establishes a two-way communication path
between two devices.

PEOF

Sets the end-ot-file string for the specified port.

PEal

Sets the end-at-line string for the specified port.
(Used only with the 4643 device driver.)

PFlAG

Sets the flagging method used by the specified
port.

PLOT

Sends information to a plotter.

PPARITY

Sets the parity used by a specified port.

STATUS3PPI

Displays a status report for all peripheral ports.

ii'lllT!AUZING THE PORT
To use a TEKTRONIX 4662 or 4663 Interactive Digital Piotter with the terminal's RS-232 peripheral port, you must set
the plotter's switches and the peripheral port settings in a
compatible way. For instance, if the plotter is set to operate
at 1200 baud, then the peripheral port to which it is attached
must also be set for 1200 baud. The terminal's plotter drivers always use device address A.

4662 Plotter. Table 3-4 shows one way the switches on the
TEKTRONIX 4662 Digital Plotter can be set for communicating with the terminal through the terminal's Option 10
Three Port Peripheral Interface.
Table 3-4
4662 PLOTTER SETTINGS

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

Switch

Setting

A
B
C
D

3
3

2
3

3-17

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

These switch positions set the 4662 as follows:

4663 Plotter. Table 3-5 shows one way to set the 4663 pIotter's parameter entry switches for use with the terminal.

Copy mode.
CR implies CR-LF.
CR.
GIN terminator
Number of stop bits
1.
No Parity.
Plotter device address
A.
Baud rate = 1200.

Suppose the plotter switches have been set as shown in
Table 3-5. In that case, the following SETUP mode commands initialize peripheral port zero in the terminal for
proper communication with the plotter:
PBAUD po: 9600
Sets peripheral port zero to communicate with the plotter at
9600 bits per second.

With the 4662's switches set as in Table 3-4, the following
SETUP mode commands will then initialize peripheral port
zero for communicating with the plotter. The terminal
remembers these settings even when turned off; thus the
commands need only be issued once, when attaching the
plotter to the terminal.

PASSIGN PO: 4663
Assigns the "4663" device protocol to peripheral port zero.
PPARITY PO: NONE
PBITSPO: 18
Sets peripheral port zero to send ASCII characters which have
eight data bits, no parity bit, and one stop bit.

PBAUD po: 1200
Sets port zero to communicate with the 4662 at 1200 bits per
second.

PFLAG PO: NONE
Disables DTR/CTS and character flagging. (Instead of flagging, the plotter's block mode protocol is used to prevent data
overrun.)

PASSIGN PO: 4662
Assigns the standard "4662" device protocol to peripheral port
zero. (If the 4662 is equipped with multiple pens - Option 31
- then the second parameter in this command should be
"4662/MP" rather than "4662.)
PPARITY PO: NONE
PBITSPO: 18
Sets peripheral port zero to send ASCII characters ~hich have
eight data bits, no parity bit, and one stop bit.
PFLAG PO: NONE
Disables DTR/CTS and character flagging at the peripheral
port. (Instead, the plotter's block mode is used to prevent data
overrun.)

Table 3-5
4663 PLOTTER SETTINGS
Parameter

Setting

Initial aspect ratio
Initial axis orientation
Interface select

4X:3Y
Y vertical, X horizontal
1 (RS-232 interface)

Initial command response format
Serial device address
Receive baud rate

3 (emulates a 4662)
A
9600

Transmit baud rate
Transmit baud rate limit
Character format

9600
Full speed
8 data bits, 1 stop bit

Receive parity/transmit parity
Communications control mode
Interface functions

Ignore/logic zero
Full duplex
CR generates LF = YES,
DEL IGNORE = NO

Attention character
Output terminator

ESC
CR

(

3-18

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

EXAMPLES OF USE

SAVEing to a PloUer

The following show several command sequences that will
transfer data to a plotter.

The SAVE command, although normally used for file creation, will format data in a single graphic segment to allow it
to be drawn correctly on to a plotter. Just give the SAVE
command with a segment number. For example, if a plotter
is attached to peripheral Port 1, you can plot segment 3 by
giving the following command:

DIRECTORY to a PloUell'
To send a directory to the plotter, the following conditions
must be met:

SAVE SEG 3 TO P1:

o The plotter must be set for "CR implies LF", since each
line in the directory report ends with c R , NOTwith CRLF.
o Other plotter parameters required are:
Attention character
Address character

However, this will tie up terminal operations until all of segment 3 has been plotted. A more efficient way is to use the
SPOOL command discussed next.

o The port device driver should have an "NT" parameter
assigned by a PASSIGN 4662/NT or PASSIGN 4663/NT
command.
o You (the operator) must pOSition the plotter pen (with the
plotter's joystick) to the upper left corner of the plotter's
viewport.
Once these conditions are met, simply give a DIRECTORY
command to the port to which the plotter is connected. For
example, if the plotter is connected to Port 0, the following
command outputs a directory for the disk in drive 0:

You can also save various classes of segments with SAVE;
see the command description in Section 6.

SPOOling to a PloUer
As mentioned earlier, although you can PLOT or SAVE
information directly to a plotter, it is generally more efficient
first to save that information in a disk file, then spool from
the disk file to the plotter, since spooling frees the terminal
for other functions. For example, suppose a plotter is
attached to Port O. To plot all visible segments, replace:
PLOT TO PO:

DIRECTORY FO: TO PO:

with the two commands:
Remember that device names must include the colon; Port

o is device PO:, not simply PO.

PLOT TO FO:TEMPFILE
SPOOL FO:TEMPFILE TO PO:

To plot a particular segment, replace:

The PLOT Command
You can draw all visible graphic segments in the current view
on an attached plotter by using the PLOT command. For
example, if a plotter is attached to peripheral Port 0, just
give the command:

SAVE SEG 3 TO PO:

with the two commands:
SAVE SEG 3 TO FO:TEMPFILE
SPOOL FO:TEMPFILE TO PO:

PLOT TO po:

A spooling operation in progress can be halted with the
STOP command.

This command also assumes that the port has been correctly configured to receive output for the attached plotter
(see the PASSIGN command).
Note, however, that this command will tie up all other terminal operations until the PLOT is complete. A more efficient
method is to use the SPOOL command discussed later.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-19

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Direct Host-to-Plotter Copy

WARNING

The commands discussed so far all depend on the terminal's ability to translate 4110 Series escape-sequence commands to equivalent plotter commands. However, it is
possible to copy from the host directly to the plotter, without
using the terminal firmware at all.
To do this you can use COpy or SPOOL with the port
assigned an "NT" parameter (PASSIGN 4662/NT or
4663/NT). This allows data to be sent directly to the plotter
without translation. You can also use the PCOPY (PortCopy) command. The advantage of PCOPY is that it sets up
a two-way data path between the plotter and the host. This
allows plotter status information, error codes, and GIN
points to be sent from the plotter back to the host. See the
4110 Series Host Programmers Manual for details.

USING A PRINTER
The 3PPI supports RS232 communication with the
TEKTRONIX 4641, 4641-1, and 4643 Matrix Printers. The
following tables show how to set up a peripheral port for
sending data to one of these printers.

Setting the switches shown in the following tables
requires opening the printer covers. DO NOT
OPEN THE COVERS WHEN THE PRINTER IS
TURNED ON.

Table 3-7
4643 SERIAL INTERFACE BOARD SETTINGS
Switch

Setting

S1-1

S1-2

S1-3

OFF

S1-4

S2-1

S2-2

S2-3

S2-4

S3-1

OFF

S3-2

OFF

S3-3

OFF

S3-4

OFF

S14-1

OFF

S14-2

OFF

Table 3-6

S14-3

OFF

PORT SETTINGS FOR PRINTERS

S14-4

S14-5

OFF

S14-6

OFF

9600

814-7

OFF

NONE

814-8

OFF

PBITS

1,8

815-1

PEOL

CRL F

S15-2

OFF

PFLAG

OTR/CTS

815-3

OFF

PASSIGN

4643

815-4

OFF

Command

4643 Settings

4641 (-1) Settings

PBAUO

9600

PPARITY

815-5

815-6

OFF

815-7

815-8

OFF

/".- .

(

3-20

REV, JAN 1984

4115B OPERATOR8

FilE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Table 3-8

COPYing to a iPrinter

4641(-1) INTERFACE CARD SETTINGS
Switch

Data can be transferred to a printer with the COPY command. For example, to output a text file called RESULTS on
the disk in drive 0 to the printer attached to Port 0, give the
following command:

Setting

OFF

COPY RESULTS TO PO:

Note that since device FO: is the default device, no "FO:"
deSignation is needed on the source. Also note that a COpy
command ties up the terminal until the COPY is completed;
if the file to be copied is of any length, it is probably better to
use the SPOOL command, discussed next.

SPOOling to a Printer
EXAMPLES OF USE
DIRECTORY to a Printer
You can output a disk or file directory to an attached printer
with the DIRECTORY command. For this to work, the port's
end-of-line string must be set to CRLF by the PEOl command. This instructs the terminal to send CRL F at the end of
each line in the directory message, rather than just CR.

As mentioned earlier, spooling allows "background data
transfers" between devices, allowing the terminal to perform other activities while the transfer is in progress. For
example, instead of sending a disk directory to the printer
with a DIRECTORY command, you could send it first to a
disk file and then spool it from the disk file to the printer
while using the terminal for other tasks. To send a directory
of a disk in drive 0 to a printer attached to Port 0, give the
following commands:
DIRECTORY FO: TO FO:DIRECT
SPOOL FO:DIRECT TO PO:

The other port communication parameters must match
those of the printer. See the 3PPI Command Summary
discussion.

Since FO: is the default device, the commands could be
given as:

Once these conditions are met, just give the DIRECTORY
command with the proper peripheral port as the device
name. For example, suppose a printer is attached to Port 0
and the port has been properly configured. To print a directory of the disk in drive 0 on the printer, just give the command:

DIRECTORY TO DIRECT
SPOOL DIRECT TO PO:

A spooling operation in progress can be halted with the
STOP command.

DIRECTORY FO: TO PO:

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-21

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

USING THE 4923 TAPE DRIVE

USING A 4691 COLOR COPIER

You can attach a TEKTRONIX 4923 Digital Cartridge Tape
Drive with Option 01 installed to one of the terminal's
peripheral ports. Plug the RS-232 cable into the MODEM
connector on the tape drive and into one of the 3PPI connectors on the rear of the terminal. Then configure that port
(say, Port 0) with the PASSIGN command:

With Option 09, the 4691 Color Graphics Copier Interface,
installed the terminal can make color copies of the screen
display. The Option 09 interface includes a connector
labeled TO 4690 SERIES COPIER on the back of the terminal, and special commands for making color copies.

PASSIGN po: PPORT

Use the PBAUD command to set the port baud rate to
match the tape drive's baud rate (shown by the tape drive's
baud rate control knob on the back of the drive).

To connect the color copier, attach the copier's cable to the
TO 4690 SERIES COPIER connector on the terminal's back
panel. Secure the cable to this connector with the wire clips
attached to the connector (Figure 3-7).
Option 09 includes the following commands:
HCDATARES {

Use the PFlAG command to set terminal flagging to
"DC1/DC3". Set all other port communication parameters
to match the conventions used in files to be stored on the
tape.
When the terminal is receiving data from the tape drive, you
can indicate an end-of-file by pressing the terminal's CANCEL key after the data has been transferred. This erases
the last received data that would otherwise be left inside the,
3PPI.

Sets the precision of data sent to the copier. A resolution of 2
makes higher resolution hard copies, but takes longer to make
each copy.
HCINTERFACE { color }

mono
Allows you to select either a color copier or a monochrome
hard copy unit to make copies in response to a copy request.
HCORIENT { horizontal}

vboHom
vcenter
vtop

Sets the orientation of the copied image on the copy medium.

USING OTHER RS232 DEVICES
You can use the 3PPI with any RS232 device as long as the
port communication parameters are compatible with or
match those of the attached device. In particular, the
PPORT (general purpose peripheral port) device driver
should be assigned to the port with the command:
PASSIGN Px: PPORT

HCCOPIES n
Sets the number of hard copies produced by each copy
request to n, where n is an integer.
HCRESERVE {~:S}
Determines whether the terminal reserves the color copier's
attention or whether the color copier's multiplexer (which polls
other connected devices) is free to make copies from other
units.

Here x is the appropriate port number (0, 1, or 2).
The other port settings depend on the requirements of the
particular device.

Each of these commands is explained in detail in the command descriptions in Section 6.
You can make hard copies of the screen on a monochrome
hard copy unit with the standard terminal (see Using A
Monochrome Hard Copy Unit discussion following). However, if you have Option 09 installed, you can still make
copies on a monochrome hard copy unit by selecting the
monochrome interface with the command:
HCINTERFACE

mono

Once the interface is selected, it remains set until you
change it or turn off the terminal.
/

"
3-22

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

COLOR COPIER
CONNECTOR

,4.\. On the 41159 Pedestal.

o
COLOR COPIER
CONNECTOR

158 Electronics Module.
4665·64

Figure 3·7. Color Copier Connector.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-23

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

Using a Multiplexed Color Copier

Hard copies are produced when:
• The terminal receives a
command.

< hardcopy> escape sequence

• The terminal receives a
sequence command.

< 401 O-hardcopy > escape

• You press the HARD COpy key, either shifted or
unshifted. The unshifted HARD COPY key makes a copy
of the screen just as it appears. The shifted HARD COPY
key makes a "reverse video" image, with black copying
to white and white to black (for color copies, other colors
copy as they appear on the screen).
• You give the following setup command:
COpy SC: TO HC:

This command copies the pixel viewport to the attached
hard copy unit. Since the COpy operation ties up all
terminal functions until the hard copy is complete, you
may want to copy the screen to disk first and then spool it
to the hard copy unit:
COpy SC: TO FO:COLORCPY
SPOOL FO:COLORCPY TO HC:

The COPY command creates a file on the disk; the terminal is then free for other operations while the SPOOL
command makes the hard copy.

NOTE
If you copy the screen to a file on disk and you plan
to make a hard copy of the file later, be sure that
the same size media is in the hard copy unit when
the hard copy is made.
When you COpy from SC: to a disk, the media size currently in the hard copy unit is encoded with the disk file. If
you change the size of the media and then spool the
stored file to the hard copy unit, the terminal issues an
error message; the error tells you that the data is formatted for another size media. To avoid this error, make sure
that the hard copy unit has the same size paper in it as it
did when the screen contents were stored to disk.

A 4691 Color Graphics Copier equipped with Option 02 (the
four-channel multiplexer) can poll up to four different
devices and make copies from any of those devices. When
a 41158/M41158 terminal with Option 09 is connected as
one of those devices, you can reserve the copier's attention
and restrict device polling with this setup command:
HCRESERVE yes

You can then make a color hard copy, either by pressing the
HARD COPY key, issuing the "Hardcopy" escape command, or by issuing a COpy or SPOOL command (with HC:
as the destination). After the copier completes the copy, the
copier's multiplexer resumes its polling of the connected
devices.
Reserving the copier can be particularly useful in these two
applications:
• When the copier is reserved, you can change the type of
media and make a copy without another device interfering. This is useful for changing from paper to film.
• When the copier is reserved, if you want to make several
copies sequentially, without interruption from another
multiplexed device, you can set HCCOPIES to the number of copies required and reserve the terminal with
HCRESERVE yes. When all the copies are completed,
the terminal restores device polling.
See the description of HCRESERVE in Section 6 for more
information.

USING A MONOCHROME HARD
COPY UNIT
A monochrome hard copy unit provides monochrome or
grayscale hard copies of the display. The cable on the
hard copy unit is attached to the TO HARD COPY connector, which is on the standard terminal back panel
(Figure 3-8).

See Section 6 for details on the COPY and SPOOL
commands.

3-24

REV, APR 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

TO HARD COPY
CONNECTOR

/},. On the 41 i 58 Pedestal.

TO HARD COPY
CONNECTOR

ItS

/;JOO

4,Q;
.~

.ci•

.B. pnthe M4115B Electronics Module.

4665-85

Figure 3·8. TO HARD COPY Connector.

41158 OPERATORS

REV. JAN 1984

3·25

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

A monochrome hard copy unit should be on for about 10
minutes before you make copies with it. If the unit is not
warmed up, copies will be faint or entirely white.

This manual assumes that the hardware for the tablet is
installed and that it is ready for use. If that is not the case, a
qualified technician should follow the installation instructions included in the 4110 Series Fl3114 Graphics Tablet

To make a copy, press the HARD COPY key on the terminal's keyboard or the COPY key on the hard copy unit.
Color displays produce gray-scale monochrome copies,
with each color being mapped to a unique gray (see the
CMAP command description in Section 6). Pressing ShiftHARD COPY makes a "reverse video" copy, with white
copying to black and black to white.

Instruction Manual.
Table 3-9 lists the terminal's setup commands that deal
specifically with the operation of the tablet. See Section 6
for more details.

Table 3-9
If the terminal has Option 09, 4691 Color Graphics Copier
Interface, installed, you can select either the monochrome
hard copy unit or the color graphics copier with the HCINTERFACE command. See the Using the 4691 Color Graphics Copier discussion earlier in this section.

TABLET SETUP COMMANDS
Command

Explanation

TBFILTER

Specifies the time and distance filtering
the tablet is to use for strokes in
Graphics Input mode.

TBHEADERCHARS

Specifies the header characters used by
the tablet when it sends data to the host
program.

TBSTATUS

Specifies how the tablet emulates the
TEKTRONIX 4953 or 4954 Graphics
Tablet.

TBSIZE

Specifies active area size of the tablet.

USING A TABLET OPTION
The two graphics tablet options (Options 13 and 14) are the
same except for the size of the tablets. Option 13 contains
an 11 x11 inch tablet; Option 14 contains a 30x40 inch tablet. Since the operating instructions are the same, in this
manual they are both referred to simply as the graphics
tablet, or just the tablet.

ATTACHING THE TABLET
Both tablets include:
• The tablet (with cables connected to it)
• The input devices (one or more of the following):
•

A stylus (standard)

• A one-button cursor (optional)
• A four-button cursor (optional)
• A bar magnet for restoring the tablet's bias

Figure 3-9 shows the tablet connectors for the 4115B and
M4115B terminals. On the rear panel of the 4115B (Figure
3-9A), there are three connectors for the tablet: one for the
input device (stylus, one-button cursor, or four-button cursor), a second for the upper left tablet cable, and a third for
the lower right tablet cable. The M4115B electronics module (Figure 3-9B), on the other hand, has a single tablet
connector on its rear panel; this is because the electronics
module connects to the tablet via a special interface box.

• A precision grid (optional)

(
3-26

REV, JAN 1984

4115B OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

STYLUS

J3003
UPPER LEFT
CORNER

TABLET INTERFACE -----"--=.;-::-~-7-~~~;,
CONNECTOR

J3004
LOWER RIGHT
CORNER

J300S

A. On the 411518 Pedestal.

TABLET INTERFACE
CONNECTOR

the M4115i81 Electronics Module.
4665·86

Figure 3-9. Tablet Interface Connector.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-27

TABLET INTERFACE
BOX

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

.,-----.!./
M4115B
ELECTRONICS
MODULE

Figure 3-10A shows how the tablet interface box connects
to the electronics module; Figure 3-108 illustrates how the
tablet cables connect to the interface box.
Whether you have a 41158 or an M41158 (with an interface
box), be sure that you plug in the tablet cables properly. If
the cables are not connected correctly, then the tablet will
not function as it should.
TABLET
INTERFACE

~CONNECTOR

THE STYLUS
There are two different kinds of fillers for the stylus. One is a
ballpoint filler; the other filler is a blank, which doesn't draw
lines. You can use either of these fillers, depending on your
needs.
To change a filler, unscrew the bottom part of the stylus just
as you would a ballpoint pen. Gently pull the filler straight
down. 8e careful not to break either of the two probes
(Figure 3-11). Insert the other filler and screw the stylus
back together.

~-+-t'-t

A. Connecting the Tablet Interface Box to the M4115B.

LOWER RIGHT
CORNER

POSITIONING THE PRECISION GRID

STYLUS

The precision grid is an optional accessory to the graphics
tablet. If you have one, the grid can be used to help you
enter data more precisely.
The procedure for positioning the grid on the tablet is
included in the 4110 Series F13/14 Graphics Tablet Instruc-

tion Manual .

.CLEANING THE TABLET SURFACE
Clean the tablet as often as necessary, using a damp cloth
and mild detergent such as window or glass cleaner. Do not
immerse the tablet in water or get it too wet. Never use a
cleaner that contains hydrocarbons, since they will dissolve
the tablet surface.

B. Interface Box Connectors.
4665-87

Figure 3-10. Attaching the Tablet to the M4115B.

~
Keep the tablet biasing magnet away from the
terminal. Internal magnetic fields may change,
requiring readjustment. Also keep magnetic tapes,
flexible disks, and other magnetically sensitive
items away from the tablet surface.

3-28

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

FILE TRANSFERS AND PERIPHERALS

RESTORING THIE TABLET BIAS

About once a week, you should use the following procedure
to restore the tablet's magnetic bias. Use this procedure
more often if the tablet begins to relay incorrect data or if the
graphics cursor moves erratically.

Pull the magnet across the tablet from the upper-left
corner towards the lower-right corner in a single,
smooth motion (Figure 3-12). Wipe the entire surface in
about two or three seconds.

Reconnect the tablet, plug the terminal back in, and
turn it on.

Turn the terminal off and unplug it.

Disconnect the tablet from the interface.

Store the magnet away from the tablet and other magnetically sensitive items (such as flexible disks and magnetic
tapes).

Figure 3-11. Taking the Stylus Apart.

Figure 3-12. Restoring the Tablet Bias.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

3-29

Graphics Input (GIN) mode allows you to send graphics
information to a host program. This section includes an
explanation of how to position the graphics cursor with each
input device and how to use each of the GIN functions.
Usually a host resident program will put the terminal into
GIN mode and prompt you for certain information. You can
use escape sequence commands in Setup mode to put the
terminal in GIN mode. For detailed information on the GIN
functions see the 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual.
The host resident program should also prompt you concerning what kind of data you should enter. For example, it might
tell you to locate a certain number of points on the screen
(the locate function), to pick a certain menu item or part of
the picture (the pick function), or to enter points continuously every so often or so far apart (the stroke function).
The devices that you can use to locate and send graphics
information to a program are:
o The terminal's thumbwheels

A program might be written so you are asked to choose
between several actions. This list of actions is called the
menu. The program would instruct you to pick the desired
action. To do so, position the graphics cursor on or near the
description of the appropriate action. The way you signal
the program that the cursor is at the position you want to
pick depends on the input device you are using. These
methods are described later in this section.
You might also be asked to pick a part of the picture to be
moved, enlarged, reoriented, or changed in some way.
Again, you would position the graphics cursor on or near the
object and signal the program that the cursor is at the location you want to pick.

THIE lOCATIE r-UNCT~ON
You can locate a particular point on the display by moving
the graphics cursor to the appropriate point on the screen.
When it is properly located, signal the program that you
have located the cursor. The input device sends the coordinates of that point to the program.

a A graphics tablet
o A 4662 or 4663 Plotter
As you locate points on the screen, you can draw lines
between these points by using the inking function. Inking is
activated by an escape sequence command (see Appendix
C) or by the GININKING setup command.

An explanation of how to position the graphics cursor with
each input device and how to use each of the functions is
included in this section.
Appendix F shows examples of GIN operations.

RUBBERBANDING
THE PiCK fUNCTION
When graphic information is stored in segments, apick
function allows you to select items or actions by positioning
the GIN cursor.

41158 OPERATORS

When you move the cursor, you can have a line "follow" the
graphics cursor. One end of the line is anchored at the last
point and the other end of the line is attached to the graphics cursor. This is called rubberbanding. Rubberbanding is
activated by an escape sequence command (see Appendix
C) or by the GINGRIDDING setup command. Both inking
and rubberbanding can be active at the same time.

REV, JAN 1984

4-1

GRAPHICS INPUT MODE

GRIDDING
A program can also specify that an invisible grid be in effect
on the screen. When a grid is active, you can only locate the
cursor on points where the vertical and horizontal lines of
the grid intersect. This allows you to precisely position the
cursor when it is necessary to draw lines that intersect at a
90° angle. When you move the graphics cursor, it may
jump from one point to the next. If this happens, you will
know that gridding is probably in effect and the cursor is
moving between points on the grid.

When you have positioned the graphics cursor where you
want it, send the location of that point to the program by
pressing any alphanumeric key. When you press the key,
the crosshair cursor blinks momentarily as the point is
transmitted to the program. Do not press the Rtn key, as that
causes invalid data to be transmitted.

The setup command, GINGRIDDING, allows you to easily
establish a grid for the input device. See Section 6.

THE STROKE FUNCTION
With a graphics tablet (Option 13 or 14), you can send a
steady stream of points to the host as you move the stylus
across the tablet surface. Since each movement of the
stylus causes a large number of pOints to be sent to the
host, the TBFILTER command is usually used to filter the
number of points sent to the host; TBFILTER allows you to
. specify a minimum distance or time between points. (See
the TBFILTER command description in Section 6.)

Figure 4-1. The Crosshair Cursor.

USING THE TERMINAL'S
THUMBWHEELS
When the terminal is in GIN mode, a graphics cursor
appears on the screen. The default is the crosshair cursor
(Figure 4-1). However, the program can select another userdefined segment to be the graphics cursor.
Position the graphics cursor with the thumbwheels
(Figure 4-2). As the arrows on the keyboard indicate, the top
thumbwheel moves the graphics'cursor up and down and
the bottom thumbwheel moves it back and forth across the
screen.
The cursor moves more slowly if you hold down the Shift
key as you rotate a thumbwheel. This allows you to position
the cursor more precisely. This is an example of vernier
action (see Section 2).
Figure 4-2. The Thumbwheels.

4-2

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

GRAPHICS INPUT MODE

US~NG

THE lrAlSlllElr

When you use a graphics tablet for a GIN device, the graphics cursor will be visible on the screen. The crosshair cursor
(Figure 4-1) is the default graphics cursor, but the program
can select any segment as the cursor. The applications
program should inform you as to what the graphics cursor
is, if it is not evident.
When the tablet is active, you can use one of three input
devices: the stylus, a single-button cursor, or a four-button
cursor (Figure 4-3).
You can locate points in an 11 x 11" square on the smaller
tablet (Option 13) and a 30 x 40" area on the larger tablet
(Option 14). This is called the active writing area. In both
cases, the center of the active writing area is the center of
the tablet.

THE STYLUS, THE ONE-BUTTON CURSOR,
AND THE FOUR-BUTTON CURSOR

The

S~ylus

Hold the stylus as you would a ballpoint pen, with the tip
resting on the tablet. The crosshair cursor on the terminal
screen tracks the stylus as you move it. The tablet can keep
track of the stylus as long as it is within 5/32 of an inch of the
tablet surface. Press down on the stylus to send the point's
location to the computer. The stylus's tip moves slightly and
the graphics cursor blinks momentarily as the point is transmitted to the applications program.

The One-BllUon

CUi'SOi'

To use the one-button cursor, lay the cursor flat on the tablet
surface with the button facing up. As you move the cursor
along the surface of the tablet, the graphics cursor follows it
across the screen. When you use the pick and locate functions, locate the appropriate point on the tablet or terminal
display and press down on the button.

STYLUS

TABLET

MAGNET

/
\
\
\
\
\

\
1..--

4-BUTTON
CURSOR

PRECISION
GRID

i-BUTTON
CURSOR

4665-33

Figure 4-3. The Option 13 Graphic Tablet.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

4-3

GRAPHICS INPUT MODE

For the stroke function, hold down the stylus or cursor button and move the stylus or cursor across the tablet surface
as if you were drawing on it. The number of points transmitted to the program depends on the setting of the TBFI LTER
command (see Section 6).

The Four-Button Cursor
Lay the cursor flat on the tablet surface with the buttons
facing up. As you move it along the surface of the tablet, the
cursor tracks it.

USING THE 4662 OR
4663 PLOTTER IN GIN MODE
Use the plotter's joystick to position the pen at the appropriate location. If you are using a 4662 to indicate to the program that you have located the pOint you want, press the
plotter's CALL button until the plotter beeps one time, then
release it. If you are using a 4663, press the plotter's DRAW
POINT button when you locate the point you want.
For additional operating instructions, see the 4662 or 4663

Operators Manual.

The functions of the four buttons can be defined by the
applications program. For example, one button might cause
inking to be used, another button might erase the line
between the next two points, the third could implement the
stroke function, and so on. The applications program should
inform you how to use the buttons.
If the buttons are not programmed, you can press any of the
four buttons to transmit the current location of the graphics
cursor to the applications program.

NOTE

When using a plotter for graphic input, the cursor
image on the terminal's screen does not continuously follow the plotter's pen. The graphic cursor
image on the terminal's screen is updated once for
every GIN event.

~'"

(
"---

4-4

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

This section provides an overview of the concepts involved
in communications between the terminal and a host computer. Most communications parameters are set by the host
- either by a system-level program or an applications program. However, some parameters must be set correctly
from the keyboard or a disk file before any communications
at all can occur. For example, if the host and the terminal
have conflicting baud rates (data transmission rates), communications will be garbled. In a similar fashion, if the host
checks for even parity and the terminal transmits odd parity,
communications problems will occur.
Therefore, it is important for the operator to understand the
basic communications concepts to avoid these problems
and to correct them promptly if they occur. The rest of this
section discusses the basic concepts that you need to monitor and correct such problems.

Table 5-1 lists all setup commands that set host communications parameters. The commands under the heading Standard Commands are standard for the terminal. The commands under the heading Optional Commands are part of
the Extended Communications Interface (Option 01).
Many of the concepts discussed here also apply to communications with other devices. In fact, several setup commands that begin with the letter P set parameters for communications through the 3PPI (Option 10) - PBAUD,
PBITS, etc. For details on all communications concepts and
commands, refer to the 4110 Series Host Programmers
Manual, your host system manuals, or your system
programmer.

Table 5-1
COMMUNICATIONS COMMANDS
Standard
Commands

ElCplanation

Optional
Commands

ElCplanation

BAUDRATE

Specifies transmit and receive baud rates.

BCONTINUECHARS

Specifies block-continue characters.

BREAKTIME

Specifies length of break transmission.

BENDCHARS

Specifies block-end characters.

BYPASSCANCEL

Specifies bypass cancel character.

BHEADERS

Specifies block-header sequences.

EOFSTRING

Specifies end-of-file string.

BLENGTH

Specifies block length.

EOLSTRING

Specifies end-of-line string.

BLINELENGTH

EOMCHARS

Specifies end-of-message characters.

Specifies maximum line length for Block
mode.

FLAGGING

Specifies whether flagging is used and what
I

ADE (ASCII Decimal Equivalent)
42
44
46
58
59

62
61
63

Underscore

91
93
95

41158 OPERATORS

CORRECTING ERRORS !i\] SETUP
COMMANDS
If you make an error while entering a setup command, you
can do one of three things.

o If you have not yet pressed the Rtn key, you can enter the
linedel (line-delete) character to erase the current line.
The factory default linedel character is cN (the ASCII
Cancel character, ADE 24); to enter this character, enter
Ctrl-X - that is, hold down the Ctrl key and press X.

o If you have not yet pressed the Rtn key, you can use the
chardel (character-delete) character to erase the characters, one by one, back to the error, then finish the line
correctly. The factory default chardel character is the
ASCII Delete character (AOE 127); to enter this character
press the Rub Out key.
o Reenter the correct form of the command. If you have
already pressed the Rtn key, you cannot repair the command. The terminal will execute the command, if it can; if
it cannot, you will see an error message on the screen.
You can usually just reenter the correct command.

REV, JAN 1984

6-9

SETUP COMMANDS

COMMAND SYNTAX
Figure 6-2 shows the format used throughout the rest of this
section to present command syntax and descriptions.
Each command description begins at the top of a column.
The column heading is the command name. If the command
requires or is part of any option(s), this is shown just after
the command name.
Following the command name is a brief statement of the
purpose of the command. If the parameters set by the command are saved in setup memory (and remembered when
the terminal is turned back on), the word Memory appears
just after the statement of purpose.
The next line shows the command syntax. This is the
abstract form of the command, showing the type and order
of parameters, and which ones are required and which are
optional. The following conventions are used:
• The command word is shown first, completely spelled
out, in all capitals and in bold.

• Parameters are separated from the command word and
from each other by spaces or commas. You can use
more than one space to separate parameters, but
repeated commas signify omitted parameters (before the
last). For example, consider the command:
GINGRIDDING 1" 100

This command indicates that the second parameter is
omitted and that the default value will be assumed.
• Parameters in square brackets - [like this]- are
optional.
• When parameters are stacked in braces -

{!~i~} ~ it

means that you must choose one from the list. When
parameters are stacked in square brackets in this way,
you may choose one, but need not choose any (that is, a
default is provided).
• When there are several variations of the syntax, two or
more syntax statements are used for greater clarity.

• Words that must be entered exactly as shown - command words and parameters - are shown in bold type,
like this. However, all such entries can be abbreviated to
their shortest unambiguous form. For example, you can
enter the command SNO Y for SNOOPY YES.
• Parameters in regular type are actually parameter names
that describe the parameter to be entered. For example,
consider the command syntax:
BAUDRATE trans rec

Here the parameter names trans and ree are chosen as a
reminder that the first parameter you enter specifies the
transmit baud rate, while the second specifies the
receive baud rate.

Figure 6-2. Command Syntax Format.

6-10

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

BAUDAATE

NOTE

The terminal's baud rate settings must be compatible with the transmit and receive baud rates used by
the host computer.

BAUDRATE
Specifies the transmitting and receiving baud rates for
communications between the terminal and the host
computer.
(Memory)
8AUDRATE trans, rec
trans is an integer parameter specifying the baud rate
at which the terminal transmits data. A value of 1
indicates the use of an external device to control the
transmission rate. The factory default transmit baud
rate is 2400.
ree is an integer parameter specifying the baud rate
at which the terminal expects to receive data from the
host. A value of 1 indicates external clocking. If you
enter no value or a 0 for "rec", it is set to the same
value as "trans." The factory default for "rec" is 2400.

The transmit and receive rates do not have to be set to the
same values. Also, either the transmit or receive rate can be
specified by an external clock while the other is specified by
the terminal firmware.
The following command sets the transmit rate to 9600 baud
and the receive rate to 2400 baud.
BAUDRATE 9600, 2400 cR
The following command sets the transmit baud rate to 2400
while the receive baud rate is controlled by an external
clock.
8AUDAATE 2400 1 cR
The baud rate parameter may be set for you by an initialization file on a disk. If it is not, you may need to consult with a
system programmer for your host computer before using
this command.

Valid baud rates for both "trans" and "rec" are:
1
50

(external clocking)

75
110
134
150
300
600
1200
1800
2000
2400
4800
9600
19200

(sets baud rate to 134.5)

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 198...

6-11

SETUP COMMANDS

BCONTINUECHARS, BENDCHARS

BCONTINUECHARS

(Option 01)

BENDCHARS

(Option 01)

Sets the block end characters for Block mode.
(Memory)

Sets the line continue characters for Block mode.
(Memory)
BCONTINUECHARS xmt,rec

BENDCHARS xmt, rcv

xmt is a single character representing the transmit
continue character. If "xmt" is omitted, it is set to null
(ADE 0). Any ASCII character is valid; the factory
default is an ampersand (&).

xmt is a single character representing the transmit
block end character. If "xmt" is omitted, it is set to null
(ADE 0). Any ASCII character is valid; the factory
default is the dollar sign ($).

rev is an single character representing the receive
block continue character. If "rev" is omitted, it is set to
null (ADE 0). Any ASCII character is valid; the factory
default is an ampersand (&).

rev is a single character representing the receive
block end character. If "rev" is omitted, it is set to null
(ADE 0). Any ASCII character is valid; the factory
default is the dollar sign ($).

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.

If you enter just the command word and no parameters,
both "xmt" and "rcv" are set to the null character (ADE 0).

If you enter just the command word and no parameters,
both "xmt" and "rcv" are set to the null character.

The terminal sends the "xmt" character to the host to indicate when a block continues to the next line. When the
terminal receives the "rcv" block continue character, the
terminal knows that the block it is receiving continues to the
next line.

The terminal transmits the "xmt" character to the host to
indicate the last line of a transmission in Block mode. When
the terminal receives the "rcv" character, the terminal
knows that it is the last line of a block transmission.

The following command specifies the percent (%) as the
transmit block continue character and the asterisk (*) as the
receive block continue character:
BCONTINUECHARS %

* cR

This parameter may be set by an applications program on
the host computer or by an initialization file on a disk. If it is
not, you may need to consult with a system programmer for
your host computer before using this command.

6-12

The following command sets the block end transmit character to the pound sign (#) and the block end receive character
to the ampersand (&):
BENDCHARS #

& cR

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

BHEADERS,BLENGTH

BHEADEAS

(Option 01)

Sets the transmit and receive header sequences for Block
mode.
(Memory)

IBlENGTH

Option 01)

Sets the block length for Block mode.
(Memory)
BLENGTH xmt, rcv

is the delimiter character. The same character must
precede and follow each parameter. The first character after the command word that is not a comma, a
space, or an edit character (see EDITCHARS) is taken
as the delimiter character for this command.

xmt is a string of up to ten ASCII characters that specifies the transmit block header sequence. Any character except those listed under Restrictions can be used
in the string. If "xmt" is omitted, it is set to the null
character (ADE 0). The factory default is "HEADTX".

)(mt is an integer parameter representing the transmit
block length. The valid range of values is from five to
65535 characters. The factory default is 256.
rev is an integer parameter which is the receive block
length value. The values range from five to 65535
characters. The factory default is 256.

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.
The following command sets the block length to 100 for both
xmt and rcv:

rev is a string of up to ten ASCII characters that specifies the receive block header sequence. Any character except those listed under Restrictions can be used
in the string. If "rcv" is omitted, it is set to the null
character (ADE 0). The factory default is "HEADRX".

BLENGTH 100,100 c R

Restrictions. The "xmt" and "rev" strings should not contain the delimiter character or any characters that appear in
the prompt string. In addition, the "xmt" and "rcv" strings
should be ones that do not normally appear in text.
If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.
If you enter just the command word and no parameters,
both "xmt" and "rev" are set to the null string.
When the terminal sends the "xmt" sequence, it Signals the
host that a block of packed data follows immediately. When
the terminal receives the "rcv" sequence, it signals the
terminal that a block of packed data follows immediately.
The following command sets the transmit block header to
"+ send" and the receive block header to" + reeve":
BHEADERS ! + send! ! + recve! c R

This parameter may be set by an applications program on
the host computer or by an initialization file on a
disk. If it is not, you may need to consult with a system
programmer for your host computer before using this
command.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

6-13

SETUP COMMANDS

BLiNELENGTH, BLOCKMODE

BLiNELENGTH

(Option 01)

Specifies the maximum length line that the terminal will
transmit in Block mode.
(Memory)

BLOCKMODE

(Option 01)

Arms the terminal for Block mode; that is, it specifies that
the terminal will go into Block mode as soon as it receives
.
the block header sequence.
(Memory)

BLiNELENGTH length
BLOCKMODE {~:S}

length is an integer parameter specifying the maximum number of characters the terminal can transmit
in one line in Block mode. The valid range is from
12 to 65535 characters. The factory default is 70
characters.

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.
The specified line length has no effect on input to the terminal for communications in non-Block mode.

yes is a keyword parameter that arms the terminal for
Block mode. This means that the terminal will enter
Block mode when it receives the next block header
sequence (see BHEADER). If you enter just the command word and no parameter, the terminal assumes
"yes" and arms itself for Block mode.
no is a keyword parameter specifying that the terminal is not in Block mode. If the terminal is in Block
mode when you enter this command, it exits from
Block mode immediately. This is the factory default.

The following command sets the line length to 55:
BLiNELENGTH 55 c R

~
Attempting to arm the terminalfor Block mode
when it is already in Block mode will cause communications difficulties with the host computer.
The following command causes the terminal to enter Block
mode:
BLOCKMODE yes c R

6-14

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

BMASTERCHARS,BNONXMTCHARS

BMASTERCHARS

(Option 01)

Sets the master characters for Block mode.
(Memory)

fBNON)(MTCHARS

(Option 01)

Sets the non-transmittable characters for Block mode.
(Memory)

BMASTERCHARS xmt, rec
:tmt is a single character that is the transmit "master
character" for Block mode. If you do not enter a value
for "xmt" it is set to null. Any ASCII character is valid;
the factory default is the pound sign (#).

DL is the delimiter character. The same delimiter character must precede and follow each parameter. The
first character after the command word that is not a
comma, space, or edit character (see EDITCHARS) is
the delimiter character for this command.

rev is a single character representing the receive
"master character" for Block mode. If you do not
enter a value for "rcv" it is set to null. Any ASCII character is valid; the factory default is the pound sign (#).

:tmt is a string of up to 20 ASCII characters that specifies the non-transmittable characters for output in
Block mode. The factory default string is the pound
sign, dollar sign, and ampersand (#$&).

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.

If you enter just the command word and no parameters,
both "xmt" and"rcv" are set to null.
The following command sets the transmit master character
to an asterisk (*) and the receive master character to a
dollar sign ($):
BMASTERCHARS

rev is a string of up to 20 ASCII characters that specifies the non-transmittable characters for input in
Block mode. The factory default string is the pound
sign, dollar sign, and ampersand (#$&).

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.
If you enter just the command word with no string for either
"xmt" or "rcv", both are set to null.

$ cR

A character is to be "non-transmittable" because it has a
special Block mode meaning to the terminal (such as the
block continue, block end, or block master characters) or
host. See the discussion of Block mode in the Host Communications Overview section.
The following command sets the plus sign (+ ) and percent
sign (%) as non-transmittable characters for both transmitting and receiving:
BNONXMTCHARS '+ %' '+ %' c R

These characters may be set by an applications program on
the host computer or by an initialization file on a disk. If they
are not, you may need to consult with a system programmer
for your host computer before using this command.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

6-15

SETUP COMMANDS

BPACKING, BREAKTIME

BPACKING

(Option 01)

Sets the transmitting and receiving packing values for Block
mode.
(Memory)

BREAKTIME
Specifies the length of the break transmission.
(Memory)
BREAKTIME ms

BPACKING xmt, xmtpack, rcv, rcvpack
ms is an integer parameter specifying the length of
the interrupt, in milliseconds. The valid range is from
o to 65535. The factory default is 200 ms. Setting
"ms" to 0 means that no break transmission is sent. If
you do not enter any value for the parameter, it is set
to zero.

xmt must be set to either 7 or 8 bits. It specifies the
size of each byte that is transmitted. The factory
default is 7 bits.
xmtpaek must be set to 6,7, or 8. It specifies the
number of data bits per byte that is transmitted. The
factory default is 6.
rev must be set to either 7 or 8. It specifies the size of
each byte received from the host. The factory default
is 7.

When you press the Break key, an interrupt is sent by the
terminal to the host. The purpose of the interrupt is to halt
execution of a host resident program or transmission of data
from the host.

revpaek must be set to 6, 7, or 8. It specifies the number of data bits per byte that is received. The factory
default is 6.

Different host computers may require different length interrupts. The length of the interrupt sent by the terminal is
determined by the BREAKTIME command.
The following command sets BREAKTIME to 400 ms.

If the terminal is already armed for Block mode, this command generates an error. See the BLOCKMODE command.
The following command sets the "xmt" value to 8, the "xmtpack" value to 7, the "rcv" value to 8, and the "rcvpack"
value to 7:
BPACKING 8 7 8 7 c R

These parameters may be set by an applications program
on the host computer or by an initialization file on a disk. If
they are not, you may need to consult with a system programmer for your host computer before using this.
command.

6-16

BREAKTIME 400 c R

Since the interrupt is handled differently by different hosts,
you should check with a system programmer for your host
before using the BREAKTIME command or the Break key.
This parameter may be set by an applications program on
the host computer or by an initialization file on a disk. If it is
not, you may need to consult with a system programmer for
your host computer before using this command.

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

BTIMEOUT, BVPASSCANCEl

BTIMEOUT

(Option 01)

Determines how long the terminal will wait for a response
from the host before retransmitting the previous block.
(Memory)

BVPASSCANCEL
Specifies the bypass cancel character.
(Memory)
BVPASSCANCEl char

BTIMEOUT seconds
seconds is an integer parameter specifying the number of seconds the terminal will wait before it retransmits a block of data. Valid values are from 0 to 65535;
a setting of 0 disables the feature. If you do not enter a
value for the parameter, it is set to zero. The factory
default is zero.

If the setting is too long, you would have to wait a long time
to become aware that there was a problem such as a block
being lost. If it is too short, the terminal might try to send a
block again just because the host was slow to respond.
Setting it to zero disables the timeout feature.

char is an undelimited single ASCII character. This
parameter is usually set to either LF (line feed) or c R
(carriage return). The factory default is LF. If no character is specified the parameter is set to the null character (ADE 0), and the bypass feature is turned off.

Remote echo computers use Bypass mode to suppress the
echoing of unnecessary control characters. The terminal
uses the bypass cancel character to get out of Bypass
mode.
The following command sets the bypass cancel character to
carriage return. The "tilde" before the first carriage return is
the literal character (see EDITCHARS).

The following command sets BTIMEOUT to 2 seconds:
BYPASSCANCEL

BTIMEOUT 2 cR
This parameter may be set by an applications program on
the host computer or by an initialization file on a disk. If it is
not, you may need to consult with a system programmer for
your host computer before using this command.

41158 OPERATORS

- c R cR

REV, JAN 1984

6-17

SETUP COMMANDS

CMAP
/"

CMAP
Determines the mapping from a surface's color indices to
particular color mixtures.
CMAP surface-number, quadruple
surface-number is an integer with one of the following values:
-1

A supersurJace consisting of all the bit
planes of all other surfaces.

1-8

A valid graphics surface number. The
surface must be defined.

The ranges for these color coordinate systems are as
follows:
HLSSystem:
H (Hue)
L (Lightness)
S (Saturation)
RGBSystem:
R (Red)
G (Green)
B (Blue)

CMYSystem:
C (Cyan)
M (Magenta)
Y (Yellow)

< color-index> < first-color-coordinate> < secondcolor-coordinate> < third-color-coordinate>

Machine RGB System:
R (Red)
G (Green)
B (Blue)

color-index is an integer in the range from 0 to 32767.
The actual number of color indices is determined by
the number of bit planes installed. If there are N bit
planes, the maximum color index is 2N_1. Any colorindex parameter greater than this maximum is set to
the maximum.
A color index of 0 specifies the background color.
color-coordinates are three integers that specify the
exact color mixture to which the color-index refers.
The color coordinates are specified in the HLS,RGB,
CMY, or Machine RGB color coordinate system,
whichever was specified in the last CMODE command. (The default on power-up is the HLS coordinate system.) Adding 1000 to the final coordinate of
any index blinks that color on and off.

6-18

o to 100
o to 100
o to 100
or 1000 to 1100

quadruple In the command syntax, "quadruple ... "
means one or more groups of four integers. (All the
quadruples together are considered to be one integer
array.) Each quadruple consists of four integers, separated by spaces or commas, as follows:

The integers within a quadruple have the following
meanings:

-32768 to 32767
o to 100
o to 100
or 1000 to 11 00

o to 100
o to 100
Oto 100
or 1000 to 11 00
Oto 255
Oto 255
o to 255
or 1000 to 1255

The CMAP command sets the color map for a particular
surface; that is, it determines the mapping from the color
indices for that surface to particular color mixtures.
This command also sets the surface gray levels corresponding to particular colors, according to the transform:
Gray level =

(.30)*(Red level) + (.59)*(Green level)
+ (.11)*(Blue level)

The resulting gray level value is rounded to the nearest
integer.

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

CIViAP, CIViODE

On power-up some of the color indices are assigned to the
default color mixtures shown in Table 6-2. For terminals with
more than the minimum number of bit planes installed,
more default colors will be defined, up to a maximum of 255.
These are listed in an appendix to the 4110 Series Command

Reference Manual.
The following command defines color index 1 for surface 2
to be yellow (color coordinates 180, 50, 100) in the HLS
system.
CMAP 2 1 180 50 100

If the surface has more than one bit plane, more quadruples
may be added. The terminal will process everything in
groups of four without regard to separators. For further
information about the CMAP command, see the < setsurface-color-map> command in the 4110 Series Command

Reference lvlanual.

DEFAULT COLORS
Color

Color

Color Coordinates

Index

MiJeture

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Transparent
White
Red
Green
Blue
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Red-Yellow(Orange)
Green-Yellow
Green-Cyan
Blue-Cyan
Blue-Magenta
Red-Magenta
Dark Gray
Light Gray

0
120
240
0
300
60
180
150
210
270
330
30
90

100
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
33
67

0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
0

4115B OPERATORS

0
0

I
I
I

Sets three color mode parameters for the terminal.
CIViODE color-specifying-mode, color-overlay-mode,
gray-mode
color-specifying-mode determines whether the RGB
(red,green,blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), HLS
(hue, lightness, saturation), or machine RGB system
of color coordinates is used for specifying color mixtures in subsequent CIViAP < set-surface-color-map >
and < set-background-color> commands. The
default is HLS.
color-overlay-mode specifies the behavior of the
terminal's writing surfaces. The factory default is
OPAQUE.
gray-mode specifies whether the terminal displays
colors (COL) or black and white (BW). The default is
COL.

Table 6-2

I
I
I

CMODIE

Color-specifying-mode. The color-specifying-mode has
four numeric parameters that determine the system to use.
Table 6-3 lists the parameters and their meaning.
In the HLS system, colors are specified by hue, lightness,
and saturation coordinates as shown on the HLS color cone
in Appendix G.
The RGB system determines a color mixture by adding
together different amounts of the additive primary colors
(much like your television set). The system derives its name
from the first letter of the three colors: red, green, and blue.
The CMY system also derives its name from the three colors
it uses: cyan, magenta, and yellow. This is very close to the
printing process.

REV, JAN 1984

6-19

SETUP COMMANDS

CMODE

Color-overlay-mode. The color-overlay-mode parameter
specifies how the writing surfaces act in relation to each
other (see Table 6-3).

Table 6-3 summarizes the CMODE parameters and their
meanings.

• The Opaque mode (Mode 1) sets all writing surfaces to
opaque. The surface in front obscures all surfaces
behind it. This is the factory default mode.

Table 6-3
CMODE PARAMETERS

• In Subtractive mode (Mode 2), the terminal behaves like
a light table in which the successive surfaces show
through those on top. For subtractive mode to work properly, the background color should be white or some other
light color.

Parameters

Keywords and Their Meaning

Color-specifyingmode

No Change

• In the Additive mode, colors drawn on one surface combine with colors on the surface in front of it. A red object
on one surface, for instance, and a green object on
another surface combine to produce a yellow color
where the two surfaces overlap.

1
2
3
4

RGB
CMY
HLS
MachineRGB

Color-overlay-mode

0
1
2
3

No Change
Opaque
Subtractive
Additive

Gray-mode

0
1
2

No Change
COL (color)
BW
(Black and White)

Gray Mode. The gray-mode parameter determines whether
the display will be in color or in black and white. If the
parameter is 0 or omitted, the current gray mode setting is
left unchanged. If the parameter is 1, the terminal is set to
display colors. If the parameter is 2, the terminal is set to
replace colors with gray levels, according to the transform:
Gray level

(.30)*(Red level) + (.59)*(Green level)
+ (.11 )*(Blue level)

The resulting gray level value is rounded to the nearest
integer.

The following command sets the color specification to HLS,
the color overlay to opaque, and the gray mode to color.
CMODE 3 1 1

For further information about the CMODE command, see
the 4110 Series Command Reference Manual.

The terminal always powers up in COL (color) mode.

6-20

REV, JAN 1984

4115B OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

CODE,COPY

CODE

COpy

Selects which command set the terminal will recognize.

Copies data from one device to another.
COpy source

CODE {TEK}
ANSI

destination

source specifies the source of the copy - that is,
what data is to be copied. Valid sources are:

TEK sets the terminal to respond to Tektronix 4110style commands.

HO:

The host port.

[FO:]filename A file on the flexible disk in drive o. If
only filename is specified, device FO:
is assumed. (Option 42 or 43)

ANSI sets the terminal to respond to commands using
ANSI X3.64 syntax.

F1 :filename

TEK mode allows the terminal to process Tektronix 4110style graphics and terminal control commands.
The ANSI setting is used to allow the terminal to process
commands in the syntax described in ANSI Standard X3.64
(ISO Standard 6429). Some of the terminal's commands are
specified in these standards; other commands conform to
the syntax, but are specific to Tektronix's implementation of
this terminal's firmware.

A file on the flexible disk in drive 1.
(Option 43)

msd:filename The msd: parameter is a mass-storage
device address chosen from the list
SO-S7, TO- T7, ... ,ZO-Z7(see
the Device Names discussion at the
beginning of this section). (Option 45,
46,47)
PO:
P1:
P2:

}

SC:

Screen contents. (Option 09)

OM:

The OMA interface (Option 3A)

SG:
PX:
CM:

}

One of the peripheral ports.
(Option 10)

OMA pseudo devices (Option 3A)

to is a keyword that indicates the direction of the
COpy operation.
destination specifies the destination of the copy that is, where the da!a is to be copied. Valid destinations are:
HO:

The host port.

[FO:]filename A file on the flexible disk in drive o. If
only filename is specified, device FO:
is assumed. (Option 42 or 43)
F1 :filename

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

A file on the flexible disk in drive 1.
(Option 43)

6-21

SETUP COMMANDS

COpy
,/

If a COpy is invoked in Setup mode and you enter anything
from the terminal's keyboard during the copy, the first 130
characters are queued and executed when the COPY is
finished. After you enter 130 characters, the bell rings each
time you press any key (except CANCEL).

msd:filename The msd: parameter is a mass-storage
device address chosen from the list
SO-S7, TO- T7, ... ,ZO-Z7(see
the Device Names discussion at the
beginning of this section). (Option 45)

po:
P1:
P2:

Before you copy a file to a disk you should make sure that
there is enough room for the file. You can determine the
length of an individual file as well as the room available on
the destination disk with the DIRECTORY command.

} One of the peripheral ports.
(Option 10)

A color hard copy device. The backHC:
[background] ground parameter must be either 0 or
1: when it is 0 or omitted, a black
screen background copies as white;
when it is 1, a black screen background copies as black. (Option 09)
DM:

You cannot copy to a file or disk that is write protected. A
disk can be write protected by the WRITE PROTECT switch
(see Section 2) or by uncovering the notch in the disk (see
Section 3). A file can be write protected by the PROTECT
setup command.

The DMA interface (Option 3A)
If there is already a file on the destination disk with the file
name you specify and it is not write-protected, the existing
file will be replaced. If the existing file is write-protected, the
copy fails and an error message is displayed.

SG:

PX:
CM:
DS:

} DMA pseudo devices (OpUon SA)

The following command copies data from a file called TESTDATA.TMP on the flexible disk in drive 0 to a file called
DATA23.DAT on the same disk:

NOTE
File access on any device is restricted to files
marked with the current usernumber (when relevant). That is, you can only copy afile marked with
the current user number on the source device.
When the file is copied to the destination device,
the file is marked with the current user number. See
the USERNUMBER command.

COpy TESTDATA.TMP to DATA23.DAT c R

The next command copies a file STUFF from the flexible
disk in drive 1 to the output device attached to peripheral
port 2:
COPY F1 :STUFF to P2:

Copying to a 4691 Color Copier

The copy operation continues until:
• an end-of-file string is encountered (see EOFSTRING).

If you have Option 09, you can copy the contents of the pixel
viewport directly to a 4691 color copier. To do this, specify
"SC:" as the source and "HC:" as the destination.

• you press the CANCEL key.
• an error is detected.

COpy SC: to HC:1

An error can be caused by many things. For example, if the
destination device is a disk drive, an error will occur if:
• there is no disk in the drive.
• the disk is write protected.
• the destination drive is trying to write onto a bad disk
area.
• there isn't enough room on the disk to hold the entire
output file.

Specifying a "1 " after the" HC:" causes a black screen
background to be copied as black; when the 1 is omitted
after HC:, a black background copies as white.
Because the COPY operation ties up all terminal functions,
you may want to first copy the screen to a disk file and then
spool the file to the copier. If you do this, then be sure that
the same size media is in the copier when the file is
SPOOLed. For example, this command copies the screen
contents to a file called "ccopy" on the disk in drive 1:
COpy SC: to F1 :ccopy

6-22

REV,JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

COPY, CRLF

When the terminal copies the screen contents, the file that
is created ("ccopy" in this example) contains information
about the paper size currently in the color copier. When the
SPOOL command:
SPOOL F1 :ccopy TO HC:

is issued, the terminal checks that the color copier has the
same size media in it as it did when the file was stored. If the
a different size media is now in the copier, the terminal
issues an error message.
When you copy the screen contents to the disk file "ccopy",
the file cannot be red is played (that is, LOADed). (Use SAVE
to create a disk file that can be redisplayed.)

If the source device is the host (HO:), you must begin the
data transmission before you enter the COPY command
from Setup mode. Once you enter the command, the terminal will wait for a data stream from the host until an end-offile string comes from the host or until the CANCEL key is
pressed.

CRlF
Specifies whether a carriage return character is displayed
as a carriage return or a carriage return + line feed.
(Memory)

yes is a keyword indicating that the terminal should
attach a line feed character to each carriage return
character.
no is a keyword indicating that the terminal should not
attach a line feed charcter to the carriage return. This
is the factory default.

A carriage return moves the cursor back to the left margin of
the current line; a line feed moves the cursor down one line
from its current position.
The following command causes the terminal to attach the
line feed character to the carriage return:

One way to arrange the data stream is:

CRlFYES c R

a Type the command to the host to begin the data stream
without the end-of-command character from outside of
Setup mode.
a Enter Setup mode.
a Type in the COPY command with the desired
destination.
a Exit Setup mode (after you press the SET UP key, the
light in the key stays on, but data is being transmitted to
the host).
a Type the end-of-command character. If your host echos
the character typed on the terminal, the above results in
the end-of-command character being the first character
in the data stream.

If you set the parameter to "yes" and the host automatically
sends a line feed character with the carriage return, the
terminal "double spaces" each time you press the Rtn key
because it is getting a line feed from the host and from the
terminal.
If the terminal is in Local mode, Rtn only returns the cursor
to the left margin of the current line unless CRLF is set to
"yes".
When the terminal is in Setup mode, pressing Rtn always
gives the carriage return + line feed combination, regardless of the CRLF setting.

Another way to do this is:
a Program the host so that there is a delay between the
time you enter the end-of-command character for the
host-data-send command and the time the data stream
begins to flow. If you use this method you should give
yourself enough delay time to enter Setup mode and
type the COPY command with the desired destination.
You may also want to use the QUEUESIZE command to
create a large input queue.
If you specify the host as destination, then be sure that the
host is ready to accept data, or you may lose data and/or
cause problems with the host.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

6-23

SETUP COMMANDS

DA21NDEX, DABUFFER

DA21NDEX

DABUFFER

Sets the alternate color index for dialog text.
(Memory)

Specifies the size of the dialog buffer.
(Memory)

DA21NDEX index

DABUFFER lines

index is a valid color index. The range for index is
from 0 through 32767; however, any value greater
than the maximum index for the terminal is set to this
maximum. If N is the number of bit planes installed in
the terminal, then the maximum color index for the
terminal is 2N_1.

lines is an integer parameter that specifies the number of lines in the dialog buffer. The minimum dialog
buffer size is two; the factory default is 34.

A change in the dialog's buffer size becomes effective the
next time the dialog area becomes visible.

This command selects the color index that will be used to
display characters in the character set determined by the
ANSI command Select-Graphic-Rendition. (See the 4110
Series Command Reference Manualfor details on this command.) The alternate color index set with DA21NDEX is
effective after Select-Graphic-Rendition is set to 1 and the
dialog area is made visible.
The color index is interpreted in terms of the color map from
the current graphics surface. See the discussion of the
DASURFACE command.

The maximum dialog buffer depends on the amount of
available memory. If you specify a dialog buffer larger than
the available memory, it is set to the available memory.
If the buffer is full when a line of text is received, the first line
is deleted to make room for the new line.
The following command sets the dialog buffer size to hold
30 lines of data:
DABUFFER 30 c R

If you change the size of the dialog buffer, the information in
the dialog area is not lost or changed unless the size is
reduced. In that case, the most recent dialog text is
retained. The new size takes effect the next time the dialog
area becomes visible.
If you try to make the dialog buffer smaller than the dialog
area, an error is detected and the buffer is set to the number
of visible lines in the dialog area.

6-24

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

DACHARS,DAENABlE

DACHARS

DAENABLE

Specifies the maximum number of characters per line in the
dialog buffer.
(Memory)

Enables or disables the dialog area.
(Memory)

DACHARS width
width is an integer parameter indicating the maximum number of characters per line. The factory
default is 80. The minimum is 5; the maximum is 80.

yes is a keyword parameter which enables the dialog
area. If you do not specify "yes" or "no," the parameter is set to "yes."

If you specify more than 80 characters per line, the terminal
sets the width to 80 characters.
If you specify more characters than what will fit (due to the
current dialog area position), then the dialog area position
changes to accommodate the specified width when you
toggle the dialog key. The following warning is displayed
the next time the dialog area is visible (you will not see the
warning if the error reporting mechanism is set to suppress
warnings):

>>
>>

Terminal Issues Message lV03:
Dialog Parameters Modified

The terminal remembers the width you specified and if the
dialog area position is changed, the width parameter is
automatically changed accordingly. (See the DAPOSITION
command description.)
If you change the width, information in the dialog area is not
lost. The new width takes effect the next time the dialog
area is visible, and when the next text is received in the
dialog area.

no is a keyword parameter which disables the dialog
area. This is the factory default.

When the dialog area is enabled, all alpha (non-graphics)
text is directed to it. The dialog area is made visible or invisible by a separate command (see the DIALOG key in Section
2 or the DAVIS command in this section). If the dialog area is
enabled when you turn the terminal on, the dialog area will
automatically be visible.
When the dialog area is disabled, alpha text is directed to
the graphics area of the screen. If the dialog area is visible
but not enabled, you can see text written in the dialog area
before it was disabled, but the subsequent text will not go
into the dialog area.
When the dialog area is enabled, pressing the Rtn key does
not cause the terminal to exit from Vector, Marker, or 401 0style GIN mode. If you are in one of those modes at the end
of a program, press the CANCEL key to return the terminal
to Alpha mode.
The following command enables the dialog are:

The following command changes the maximum width of
each line in the dialog area to 35:
DACHARS 35

41158 OPERATORS

DAENABlE c R

REV, JAN 1984

6-25

SETUP COMMANDS

DAINDEX, DALINES

DAINDEX

DALINES

Specifies color indices in the dialog area.
(Memory)

Specifies the number of lines of the dialog buffer displayed
on the screen.
(Memory)

DAINDEX character, background
DALINES lines
character is an integer parameter specifying the color
index of text in the dialog area. The factory default for
the character parameter is 1 (white).

lines is an integer parameter, specifying the number
of lines in the dialog buffer which are to be visible. The
factory default is five. The valid range is from 2 to 64.

background is an integer parameter specifying the
color index of the background of the character cell in
which the character is drawn. The factory default is 0
(transparent).

If you specify more visible lines than the current dialog area
position allows, the terminal automatically changes the
position to allow the specified number of lines. In that case
the following warning is displayed the next time the dialog
area becomes visible (you will not see the warning if the
terminal's error reporting mechanism is set to suppress
warnings):

The range for both character and background is from
othrough 32767. The actual number of distinct color
indices in the terminal depends on the number of bit
planes installed. If N is the number of bit planes, the
maximum index number is 2N-1.lf you specify a color
index larger than this maximum, it is set to the
maximum.

>>
>>

With the standard four bit planes, color indices range from 0
to 15. With six bit planes, color indices range from 0 to 63.
With eight bit planes, color indices range from 0 to 255.

Terminal Issues Message LV03:
Dialog Parameters Modified

If you change the number of visible lines, the information in
the dialog buffer is not changed or lost. The change is effective the next time the dialog area is made visible (see
DAVIS).
If you set the dialog area larger than the dialog buffer, the
buffer size is automatically increased to match the dialog
area size. If there is not enough terminal memory available
to do this, both the dialog area and the dialog buffer are set
to the maximum size allowed by the available memory.

NOTE

Other 4110 Series terminals may process a third
parameter (called a wipe index) in this command.
For compatibility, this terminal accepts the third
parameter, but ignores it.

The following command causes 15 lines of the dialog buffer
to be displayed at a time:

When you change a dialog area index, it is effective the next
time the dialog area is made visible. Characters already in
the dialog area are not affected.

DALINES

Note that if you set both indices to 0, the dialog area would
be invisible because you would have transparent characters
and transparent character cells on a transparent background. Text in the dialog area would also be invisible if you
set both indices the same since you would have the same
color characters and character cells on the same color
background.

6-26

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS
DAM ODE, DAPOSITION

DAiVlODE

DAPOSITION

Specifies the writing mode for the dialog area.
(Memory)

Specifies the location of the lower-left corner of the dialog
area.
(Memory)

DAM ODE {rePlaCe

}

overstri/>
>>

Terminal Issues Message LV03:
Dialog Parameters Modified.

DASURFACE
Specifies the surface whose current color map will be used
for displaying dialog text.
(Memory)
DASURFACE surface-number

If you change the position of the dialog area, information
already in the dialog area is not lost. It appears at its new
position the next time the dialog area is made visible
(see DAVIS).
The following command moves the lower-left corner of the
dialog area near the center of the screen (if DACHARS is
set to 40 or more or if DALINES is set to 17 or more, the
terminal adjusts the actual position):

surface-number is an integer that specifies a graphic
surface in the terminal. Valid values of surface-number are -1 and from 1 through 8, inclusive. The effective maximum value, however, depends on the
number of bit planes installed in the terminal. The
factory default for DASURFACE is 1 (the front-most
surface).

DAPOSITION 2049, 1561 c R

This command selects the graphic surface whose color
map will be used when the dialog colors are set with the
DAINDEX or DA21NDEX commands. Since the dialog area
is a separate surface from the graphic surfaces, this command in effect sets the color map for the dialog "surface" to
the color map of one of the graphic surfaces. This command
will be used in conjunction with the DAINDEX and DA2INDEX commands, which set the actual color indices
assigned to text and character background.
For example, consider the following two commands:
DASURFACE2
DAINDEX3 6

6-28

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

DASURFACE, DAVIS

The DASURFACE 2 command instructs the terminal to use
the color map defined for graphic surface 2 when displaying
dialog colors. The DAINDEX 3 6 command sets the dialog
text color to color 3 and the character background color to
color 6, as these color indices are defined for graphic

DAVIS
Specifies whether or not the dialog area is visible.
(Memory)

surface 2.
The effective maximum surface-number is determined by
the number of bit planes installed in the terminal. If a surface-number greater than the maximum is specified, the
surface-number is set to the maximum for the terminal.
Before DASURFACE is effective, surfaces must be defined
for the terminal by the < set-surface-definition > command
(see the 4110 Series Command Reference Manual). If
surfaces are not defined, DASURFACE causes an error
message.

NOTE

The action of this command in some other 41!O
Series terminals is slightly different. In those terminals, DASURFACE actually instructs the terminal
to display dialog text on the specified graphic surface. The resulting visual effect, however, is similar.

yes is a keyword specifying that the dialog area
should be visible. This is the power up and reset
default if the dialog area is enabled. If you do not
enter "yes" or "no," the terminal defaults to "yes."
no is a keyword specifying that the dialog area should
not be visible. This is the power up and reset default if
the dialog area is not enabled.

Entering this command has the same effect as pressing the
DIALOG key. DAVIS yes makes the dialog area visible and
turns the light in the DIALOG key on. DAVIS no makes the
dialog area invisible and turns the light in the key off. This
command takes effect immediately
If the dialog area is enabled when the terminal is turned on,
the dialog area is automatically visible.
You can use the DAVIS command to update the dialog area
if you change any of its attributes. For example, if you
change the dialog area's position and the number of visible
lines, enter the following command to make the changes
effective:
DAVIS cR
Even though the dialog area may already be visible, this
command updates it as though the dialog area were turned
off and back on again. (You can also toggle the DIALOG key
to update the dialog area display.)

41158 OPERATORS

REV. JAN 1984

6-29

SETUP COMMANDS

DEFINE

Specifying a Key or Integer

Defines a macro and associates it with a key or an integer.

Indicate an alphanumeric key you want to associate with a
macro by pressing the key or by entering its ADE value.

DEFINE [macro-identifier]
[all]
DEFINE key, DLmacroDL
DEFINE key, DLmacro

[KE

macro

KE]

macro-identifier specifies the key or integer with
which this macro is to be associated. If the command
is terminated after this parameter, the macro associated with the specified key or integer is deleted.

For example, the following commands both assign a macro
to the uppercase A. After this command, whenever you
press the uppercase A, the character sequence "a macro or
string" would be transmitted.
DEFINE A /a macro or string/ c R
DEFINE 65 /a macro or string/ c R

Each function key can be identified by a mnemonic abbreviation or by an integer as in Table 6-4.

all is a keyword indicating that all existing macros
should be deleted.

Table 6-4
FUNCTION KEY IDENTIFIERS

DL is the delimiter character. You can use any ASCII
character to delimit the macro except:
a comma
a space
the "character delete" character (see
EDITCHARS)
the "line delete" character (see EDITCHARS)
the "literal" character (see EDITCHARS)
The first character after the "key" parameter that is
not a space, comma, or edit character is taken as the
delimiter for that macro. The delimiter should not
occur in the macro itself, since the second use of the
delimiter terminates the macro.
macro is the character or character string generated
when you press the specified key or when the host
executes the macro. The total length of the DEFINE
command (including the command word and macro)
can be a maximum of 130 characters. If you want to
include a "carriage return" or one of the edit characters in the macro, it must be preceded by the "literal"
character - see the EDITCHARS command.

Mnenomic

Integer

Key

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Fa
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8

(128)
(129)
(130)
(131)
(132)
(133)
(134)
(135)
(136)
(137)
(138)
(139)
(140)
(141)
(142)
(143)

function key 1
function key 2
function key 3
function key 4
function key 5
function key 6
function key 7
function key a
shifted fUflction key 1
shifted function key 2
shifted function key 3
shifted function key 4
shifted function key 5
shifted function key 6
shifted function key 7
,;hifted function key a

The following commands show the two ways to assign "a
macro or string" to function key 1.
DEFINE F1 /a macro or string/ c R
DEFINE 128 /a macro or string/ c R

is the "key execute delimiter" character. When this
character appears in a macro, it changes the direction
of the macro expansion. If the macro was directed to
the host, the key execute delimiter causes it instead
to be directed to the terminal; if the terminal had been
receiving the macro it is subsequently sent to the
host. The expansion of a subsequent macro starts in
the same direction as when the last macro ended. The
"key execute delimiter" is defined by the KEYEXCHAR
command.
KE

6-30

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

DEFINE

Associating a Macro With an Integer

For example, the following command programs the F,2 key
to disable the dialog area:

You can assign an integer value for the "key" to cause the
macro to be associated with the specified integer. One valid
range of integers is 144 to 34767. A macro associated with
an integer in this range can only be executed by a command
from the host (or by using a special form of commands
called "escape sequences").

DEFINE F2 IDA ENABLE no - CRI c R

The" - " before the first c R is the literal character (factory
default). It causes the first c R to be displayed and included in
the macro definition, rather than being executed immediately. Another example is:
DEFINE F4 ICOPY HO: TO FO: HOST. DATA - CRI

Another group of macros, byte macros, are identified by
integers in these ranges:

Using the Key !E)(eC!..lte Delimiter

o -32768 to -32742
o -32740 to -32737
o -32608 to -32513
These macros are executed when the host sends a character that matches the identifying integer. To match a character to an integer, subtract 32768 from the character's ASCII
decimal equivalent. For example, if you define a macro
identified by -32743, when the host sends the EM character,
this macro is executed, since the decimal equivalent of EM is
25 (25-32768 = -32743). Usually byte macros are defined
by a host or local program instead of the operator.
The following command shows how to associate "a macro
or string" with the integer 1000:
DEFINE 1000 la macro or stringl c R

Carriage Return and Edii Characters
Since the carriage return control character is executed in
Setup mode when you press the Rtn key, it must be treated
specially to be part of a macro. The same is true for the keys
reserved as edit characters (see EDITCHARS).

When a macro is expanded by pressing a key, every time
the terminal encounters the key execute delimiter it
reverses the direction of the macro expansion. (When a
macro is expanded with the escape command "ExpandMacro," the terminal ignores the key execute delimiter
character. The key execute delimiter character is also
ignored when the terminal is in Setup mode.)
This command:
DEFINE 128 IFORT GRAF GRAF - CRI CR

I or < 401 O-hardcopy > command.

(Option 09)

GINWINDOW first-corner, second-corner
HCCOPIES number
first-corner is a corner of the window in terminal
space into which a GIN device area is mapped. The
range of valid values is 0 to 4095 for both x and y
coordinates.

number is an integer in the range 0 through 65535
that indicates the number of hardcopies to produce
for each request.

second-corner is another corner of the window in
terminal space into which a GIN device area is
mapped. The range of valid values is 0 to 4095 for
both x and y coordinates.

This command sets the number of copies produced by each
hardcopy request. It requires the Option 09, 4691 Color
Graphics Copier Interface, and a color copier attached to
the terminal. A hardcopy request occurs when:

The x- and y- coordinates you assign are sorted so that any
two opposite corners specify the rectangle.

o You press the HARD COPY key (either shifted or
unshifted).
o The terminal receives a < hardcopy> command.
o The terminal receives a < 401 O-hardcopy > command.
If you specify zero for the number of copies (or omit the
parameter), one copy is produced.
The color hardcopier interface must be currently selected to
produce a color hardcopy from a regular hardcopy request.
See the HCINTERFACE command for more information.
When the terminal is turned on, the number of copies is
always set to one.

41158 OPERATORS

REV,JAN 1984

6-45

SETUP COMMANDS

HCDATARES, HCINTERFACE

HCDATARES

(Option 09)

Sets the color resolution of data sent to the color hardcopier.
(Memory)

HCINTERFACE

(Option 09)

Sets the hardcopy interface the terminal uses to produce a
hardcopy.
(Memory)

HCDATARES [resolution]
resolution is an integer parameter that must have a

HCINTERFACE {mono}
color

value of 1 or 2. A value of 1 sets one-byte color resolution. A value of 2 sets two-byte color resolution. If
omitted, one-byte resolution is set.

mono is a keyword specifying that the terminal use
the monochrome hardcopy interface.
color is a keyword specifying that the terminal use the

One-byte color resolution formats data sent to the color
hardcopier with one-byte resolution (two-bit precision) for
each of three colors: red, green, and blue. Two-byte color
resolution formats data with two-byte resolution (four-bit
precision) for each of these colors.
Two-byte resolution copies terminal colors more precisely,
but slows data transfer. In addition, if you copy data from
SC: (the screen contents) to a disk file, more storage space
is required.

color hardcopy interface. This interface is used with
the 4691 Color Graphics Copier.

Either a monochrome copier or a color copier can produce
hardcopies. The two types of copier use different interfaces
to the terminal. The HCINTERFACE command lets you
choose which of the two interfaces the terminal uses when it
produces a hardcopy.
Hardcopies are requested in three ways:

The setting is remembered when the terminal is turned off
or reset.

• You press the HARD COPY key (either shifted or
unshifted).
• The terminal receives a < hardcopy> command.
• The terminal receives a < 401 D-hardcopy > command.
The hardcopy interface can be selected by either a
< select-hardcopy-interface > command from a program
(see 4110 Series Command Reference) or a HCINTERFACE
command issued by the operator. The copier connected to
the selected interface is used for all hardcopy requests until
a different interface is selected.
The default interface when the terminal is turned on or reset
is monochrome.

6-46

REV, APR 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

HCORIENT

(Option 09)

Sets image orientation on color hardcopies.
(Memory)

Figure 6-5 shows the possible orientations of the image with
respect to the media.
The orientation applies only to the 4691 Color Graphics
Copier. The setting is retained when the terminal is turned
off or reset.

hOrizontal}
HCORIENT { vbottom
vcenter
vtop
horizontal is a keyword that matches the long axis of
the image to the long axis of the media.

vbottom is a keyword that matches the long axis of
the image to the short axis of the media and positions
the image at the bottom of the media.

IMAGE

MEDIA

/IMAGE

horizontal

vcenter is a keyword that matches the long axis of the
image to the short axis of the media and positions the
image at the center of the media.

MEDIA

"bottom

vtop is a keyword that matches the long axis of the
image to the short axis of the media and positions the
image at the top of the media.

HCORIENT is one of the commands Option 09 provides for
using the 4691 Color Graphics Copier. This command sets
the orientation of the hardcopy image with respect to the
hardcopy media (the paper or transparency on the copier).

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

..
command in the 4110 Series

time is an integer parameter specifying the minimum
number of milliseconds that elapse between successive points transmitted to the program. The valid
range is from a to 32767. The default is a (time filtering is not used).

Command Reference Manual.

Setting both distance and time to a disables all filtering activity. See the 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual discussion of GIN (Graphic Input).
The following command sets the graphics tablet to locate
every 100th paint every 100 milliseconds:
TBFllTER 10 100 100 cR

NOTE

If both the distance and time filters are active,
both conditions must be met before a point is
transmitted.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

6-69

SETUP COMMANDS

TBSIZE, TBSTATUS

TBSIZE

(Options 13/14)

The graphic tablets included with Options 13 and 14 have a
slightly larger active area than the TEKTRONIX 4953 and
4954 tablets used with earlier 401 0 series terminals. To
emulate the earlier tablets more closely, the < set-tabletsize> command is included in versions 2 and above of the
firmware for Options 13 and 14.

TBSTATUS

(Options 13/14)

Specifies whether or not the terminal status byte is sent
when the graphics tablet pen is lifted away from the tablet
surface.
TBSTATUS

out
in

out specifies that the status byte is not sent when the
tablet pen is lifted away from the tablet surface.

large
}
TBSIZE ( small
automatic

in specifies that the status byte is sent when the tablet
pen is lifted away from the tablet surface. This is the
factory default.

large has the tablet operating as an option to a 4110series terminal. The active area of the Option 13 tablet is 121 square inches (11 x 11 in, or 279 x 279 mm).
The active area of the Option 14 tablet is 1200 square
inches (30 x 40 in, or 762 x 1016 mm).
small is used when a smaller active area is required,
. to emulate more closely the 4953 and 4954 tablets
used with earlier 4010 series terminals. The Option 13
tablet emulates the 4953 tablet, with an active area of
105 square inches (10.24 x 10.24 in, or 260 x 260
mm). The Option 14 tablet emulates the 4954 tablet,
with an active area of 1180 square inches (30.72 x
38.4 in, or 780 x 975 mm).

This emulates the HEADER strap in the TEKTRONIX 4953
Graphics Tablet board in 4010 Series terminals. For more
information, see the description of the < set-tablet-statusstrap> command in the 4110 Series Command Reference

Manual.

automatic is used when the tablet is enabled with an
< enable-GIN> command from the host; the entire
tablet area is used. When the tablet is enabled with
the < enable-4953-tablet-GIN > command from the
host, the smaller active area of the tablet is used,
emulating the smaller active area of the 4953 and
4954 tablets.

The following command sets the terminal to use the smaller
area of the 4953/4954 tablets.
TBSIZE SMALL c R

See the 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual and the
4110 Series Command Reference Manual for detailed information concerning TBSIZE.

6-70

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

SETUP COMMANDS

USERNUMBER,XMTDElAV

USERNUMI8ER

){MTDELAV

Sets the user number that the terminal uses when accessing files.

Specifies how long transmission of data to the host is halted
after the terminal encounters an end-of-message character
(see EOMCHAR).
(Memory)

USERNUMBER user-number

}(MTDELAV ms

user-number is an integer from 0 through 15.

User numbers serve to keep the files for different users
separate in a friendly, low-security environment. For example, each user sharing a given terminal workstation or mass
storage device might use a unique user number. In this way,
each user can copy, print, transfer, delete, or create files
without danger of destroying or damaging another user's
data.
When you enter a command that includes a [device]
filename parameter, for either a source or destination
parameter, the terminal accesses only information (on that
device) that is marked with the current user number. For
example, suppose your user number is 11. At the end of a
work session, you can give the command:

ms is an integer parameter representing the number
of milliseconds delay in transmission. The acceptable
range of values is from a to 65535; the factory default
is 100.

The following command sets the transmit delay to 300 milliseconds:
XMTDELAY 300 c R

COpy FO: WORKFILE. TMP to S1: WORKFILE.SAV

The terminal copies your WORKFILE.TMP on the flexible
disk in drive 0 to WORKFILE.SAV on the mass storage
device in device S1: and marks the file with user number 11.
This is also convenient for directory information. If you give
the command:
DIRECTORY F1:

The terminal lists only files marked with user number 11.
See also the following commands in this section: COPY,
DELETE, DIRECTORY, DISMOUNT, FORMAT, LOAD, PROTECT, RENAME, SAVE, and SPOOL.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

6-71

SETUP COMMANDS

XMTLlMIT

XMTLlMIT
Specifies the upper limit for data transmission from the
terminal to a host computer.
(Memory)
XMTLlMIT limit

limit is an integer parameter indicating the fastest
rate at which the terminal is to send data to a host.
The range of valid values is from 110 to 65535; the
factory default is 19200.

If the host cmputer cannot effectively receive data ata arate
at which the communications port is specified, you can use
XMTLlMIT to cause the terminal to pace its transmission of
data at the given limit. This lowers the effective baud rate
without altering the baud rate itself.
The following command sets the transmit limit to 1800 bits
per second.
XMTLlMIT 1800

This terminal operating parameter is host dependent. It
should usually be set by an application program when it is
executed from the host. If it is not, see a systems programmer for your host computer for more information. See the
4110 Series Command Reference Manual for additional
details.

6-72

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

~NuRODUCT~ON

SIEVIERITY LEVELS

Each error condition which a 4110 Series terminal can
detect has an error code and a severity level.

There are four severity levels, numbered from zero to three:

When the terminal detects an error condition, it stores the
error code and severity level in a limited-size queue for later
retrieval by a REPORT-ERRORS command from the host.
If the error's severity level is greater than or equal to the
current error threshold, then the terminal displays a message for the operator. When the terminal is powered up or
reset, its error threshold is set to 2, so that the only errors
displayed are those with a severity level of 2 or more. The
error threshold can be changed with the SET-ERRORTHRESHOLD command from the host or the
ERRORLEVEL setup command from the keyboard.
Since the terminal has two command sets, TEK commands
and ANSI commands, the error codes for the two sets are
listed separately. TEK error codes begin with two alphanumeric characters, while ANSI error codes begin with either a
bracket ([) and a character, or a character and a space.
Other than this difference, errors from the two command
sets are treated the same.

41158 OPERATORS

o Level O. Errors of severity level zero are hardly errors at
all. The associated message begins with the words "Terminal issues message ... ". Typically, these errors occur
for commands which are not installed. For instance,
when 4112 commands are sent to a 4114, the terminal
detects level zero errors.
o Level 1. Level one errors are "warnings." The corresponding messages begin with the words "Terminal
issues warning ... ". Typically these occur when the command is inappropriate: deleting a segment that does not
exist, for example.
o Level 2. Level two errors result from invalid commands.
For instance, a command's parameter may be outside
the specified range. The corresponding message begins
with the words "Terminal detects error ... ".
o Level 3. Level three errors occur when the command is
valid, but for some reason the terminal cannot execute
the command. (For instance, there may be insufficient
memory to hold all the information being included in a
segment definition.) For these errors, the message starts
with the word, "Terminal system error... ".

REV, JAN 1984

A-1

ERROR CODES

ERROR CODES
The error codes are each composed according to the followingscheme:
• Each error code consists of four characters.
• In most error codes, the first two characters are the op
code (operation code) for the command which causes the
error. For example, error IA11 is associated with the SETPICK-APERTURE command.
Some errors, however, are associated with no particular
command. For these errors, the first two characters are a
letter and a digit. For instance, error 1011 (invalid devicejunction code) can occur with many graphic input commands. Again, error J 109 (disk hardware initialization
error) can occur only when the terminal is turned on
before any commands have been sent to it.
• The third character in an error code is a digit. Digits from
1 to 9 name the parameter with which the error is associated. Digit 0 indicates that the error is associated with
the command as a whole: the op code itself is regarded
as the "zeroeth parameter." An error in the second
parameter, for example, is indicated by the digit 2. Errors
in parameters 10 and above are indicated by the digit 9.
• The fourth character in an error code is also a digit. The
most frequently used digits here are 0, 1, 2, 3 and 9:

Indicates an "existence problem." The object referred
to does not exist when it ought to exist, or does exist
when it ought not to exist.
Indicates an "invalid value."

2 Indicates an "out of memory problem."
3 A "context error." The command is valid, but cannot
be executed at this time. (For instance, trying to end a
segment when no segment is currently being
defined.)
9 A hardware error prevents or halts execution. (For
example, the door is open on a disk drive when you
try to copy from it.)

A-2

For example, consider the "S01 0" error code. Here, "SO"
means the BEGIN-SEGMENT command, which has the
syntax ECSO into The "1" refers to the first (and only) parameter of that command, which is the segment number. The
"0" indicates an "existence problem;" the segment
referred to already exists.

Commands Not Installed in the Terminal
Op codes beginning with letters from I to Z may occur in
present or future 4110 Series terminals. When the terminal
receives one of these escape-sequence commands and
does not recognize that command, it detects an error of
severity level zero. After detecting the error, the terminal
then ignores all subsequent characters until it receives an
EC, Gs , FS, or Us character. (It does this so as to skip over any
parameters for the unrecognized command.)
For instance, suppose the terminal does not have Option 01
installed, and the host sends it the following character
sequence:
EcODOEcKA1

Since Option 01 is not installed, the terminal does not recognize the SET-DUPLEX-MODE: 0 command, EcODO. On
receiving the EcOD op code, it detects a type 0000 error
(and displays the 0000 error message if the error threshold
is set to zero). It ignores the following character, O. On
receiving the following EC , it resumes processing of the
characters received, so that it correctly interprets and executes the ENABLE-DIALOG-AREA: 1 command, EcKA 1.
If your host program sends commands that may not be
installed in all 4110 Series terminals, then these commands
should be followed by other commands which are recognized by all terminals in the series. For instance, after issuing commands to change raster terminal (4112, 4113, 4115)
only settings, the host could send a Us character (the
ENTER-ALPHA-MODE command) before sending any
alphatext to the terminal. That way, if the program is also
sent to a 4114 or 4116 terminal, the Us character causes the
terminal to resume normal processing of the characters it
receives.

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

HARDWARE ERRORS
Disk Hardware Errors
If the terminal has any of the disk options (Options 42, 43,
45,46, or 47), it may issue disk hardware errors. The errors
have this format:

In the first line,.xx refers to the command (with the two-letter
error code) and n refers to the number of the parameter that
caused the error. In the second line of the hardware error,
yy: is the device name and zzz refers to the error number
listed in Table A-1. If you get a disk hardware error and cannot determine its cause using Table A-1, contact your local
Tektronix Field Office for more information.

> > Terminal Detects Error xxn9
> > Device yy: Hardware Error ZZ2
Table A-1
DISK HARDWARE ERRORS
Device
Description

Error
No.

8" Floppy Drive
(Devices FO: or Ft:)

2
3
4
6
7
10
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
28

Explanation
No seek complete.
Write fault.
Drive not ready.
No track O.
Multiple drives selected.
Insufficient capacity.
Controller chip error.
ID CRC error.
Data CRC error.
ID address mark not found.
Data address mark not found.
Record not found.
Seek error.
DMA timeout error.
Write-protected.
Bad block found.
Interleave error.
Unable to determine a disk
format.
Invalid command from disk
driver.
Insufficient internal data buffer.
Controller chip system error.

32
34
35
5%" Floppy (4925 or
4926 Option 25)

2
3
4
5
6
7
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25

4115B OPERATORS

Device
Description

Error
No.

51/4 Floppy (cont)

32
34
35
48
49

10-Megabyte
Hard Disk
(4926 or
Option 46/47)

No seek complete.
Write fault.
Drive not ready.
Drive not selected.
No trackO.
Illegal or multiple drives
selected.
Insufficient capacity.
ID CRC error.
Data CRC error.
ID address mark not found.
Data address mark not found.
Record not found.
Seek error.
DMA timeout error.
Write-protected.
Bad block found.

1 or 129
2 or 130
3 or 131
4 or 132
6 or 133
160r 144
17 or 145
180r 146
20 or 148
21 or 149
24 or 152
25 or 153
26 or 154
28 or 156
29 or 157

300r158
31 or 159

32 or 160
330r 161
48 or 176
49 or 177
50 or 178

REV, JAN 1984

Explanation
Invalid command from disk
driver.
System error.
Power fail.
RAM diagnostic failure.
Program memory checksum
error.
No index detected from disk
drive.
No seek complete from disk
drive.
Write fault from disk drive.
Drive not ready after it was
selected.
Track zero not found.
ID field read error.
Uncorrectable data error.
Address mark not found.
Target sector not found.
Seek error.
Correctable data error.
Bad track flag detected.
Format error.
Illegal (direct) access to an
alternate track.
Alternate track to be formatted
is either a bad track or already
an alternate.
Target alternate track is not
formatted as an alternate.
Alternate track to be formatted
is the same track as the bad
track itself.
Invalid command from disk
driver.
Illegal disk address.
RAM diagnostic failure.
Program memory checksum
error.
ECC diagnostic failure.

A-3

ERROR CODES

Disk System Context Errors

3PPI Hardware Errors

For some file system errors, a supplemental error message
may be displayed. This supplemental message describes
the type of error which has occurred. Table A-2 explains
these context error messages:

For the Three Port Peripheral Interface option (Option 10),
the terminal reports hardware errors in this format:

In the first line, xx refers to the command (with the two-letter
error code). The n in both lines refers to the number of the
parameter that caused the error. Yy refers to the error number listed in Table A-3.

TableA-2
DISK SYSTEM CONTEXT ERRORS
Error

Explanation

Disk Full

There is no more room to write data on
the specified disk.

Drive Not Ready

There is no disk in the specified drive, or
the door is open.

Write Protected

The disk to which you are trying to write
can only be read at this time.

Invalid Device Specifier

The device you specified is not valid for
this command.

File Not Found

The terminal cannot find the specified
file on the specified device.

Directory Full

The disk already contains the maximum
number of files permitted.

File Full

There is no more room to write data in
the specified file.

File Currently Being
Written

Trying to access a file that is currently
being written to.

Invalid Media Format

The disk in the specified device is
formatted with an unsupported format.

Device Busy

The specified device is currently active
and therefore cannot be accessed.

Invalid File Specifier

You specified a device and filename
when only a filename is valid.

File Busy

Trying to protect or rename a file that is
currently being written to or read.

File Already Exists

You are trying to rename a file to a name
that already exists.

A-4

> > Terminal Detects Error xxn9
> > Port Hardware Error Type yy, Parameter n.

REV, JAN 1984

TableA-3
3PPI HARDWARE ERRORS
Error
Number
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

45
46
47

Explanation
3PPI: Circular buffer overrun.
3PPI: 8250 data overrun.
3PPI: Errors 33 and 34.
3PPI: 8250 parity error.
3PPI: Errors 33 and 36.
3PPI: Errors 34 and 36.
3PPI: Errors 33, 34, and 36.
3PPI: 8250 framing error.
3PPI: Errors 33 and 40.
3PPI: Errors 34 and 40.
3PPI: Errors 33, 34, and 40.
3PPI: Errors 36 and 40.
3PPI: Errors 33, 36, and 40.
3PPI: Errors 34, 36, and 40.
3PPI: Errors 33,34,36, and 40.

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

DMA Transfer Errors
DM: Device Errors. When DM: is specified as a device (with
Option 3A: DMA Interface installed), there are error messages that may be reported if certain errors are generated
(instead of the standard "Terminal detects ... "). These error
messages are:
"DMA Option 3A
failed to power up"

There is not enough memory available to satisfy the requirements for
DM: use.

"Invalid DMA
Parameter"

The parameter portion of the
DM:parameter device is invalid.

Pseudo Devices. When the DMA pseudo devices are specified as devices, there are error messages that may be
reported if certain errors are generated (instead of the
standard "Terminal detects ... "). These error messages are:
"DMA Option 3A
There is not enough memory availaPseudo Devices failed ble to satisfy the requirements for
DMA pseudo device use.
to power up"
"Invalid Pseudo
Device Parameter"

The parameter portion of the
pseudo device specifier is invalid.

"Data Format Error"

There is an error in the data
received from the host computer by
a OS: or SG: pseudo device.

Also, for some file system errors ("type 9" errors such as
JC09, JC39, JD39, etc.), a supplemental error message is
displayed when an error is generated by a transfer involving
the DMA. This supplemental message describes the type of
error which has occurred. Table A-4lists these errors:

TableA-4
DMA TRANSFER ERRORS
Error

Explanation

Host not ready for DMA
transfer

The host computer is not ready to start a
DMA transfer (as indicated by the
READY line of the DR 11 B board).

Host aborted DMA
transfer

The host computer has sent an ABORT
code to the terminal (via the FNCT
lines).

DMA transfer failed

The host computer tried to transfer more
data in a block than was specified in the
last SET-DMA-BLOCK-SIZE command
OR the host tried to initiate a block
transfer before the end of the last
terminal-to-host DMA block transfer.

Host termination signal
invalid

The signals sent by the host at the end
of a DMA block transfer are invalid.

4115B OPERATORS

REV. JAN 1984

A-5

ERROR CODES

TEK ERROR CODES
%1

SELECT-CODE = Ee%1 int

%!OO (Level 0): Unrecognized command; terminal firmware is Version 3.
%!11

(Level 2): Invalid command-set (must be 0 or 1.)

(For several GIN commands.)

1002

(Level 2): Insufficient memory available for GIN
functions. (Only detected at power-up or
during a RESET.)

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
description of the ENABLE-GIN command for a table of device-function
codes.)

ENABLE-4953-TABLET-GIN
DISABLE-4953-TABLET-GIN = Ee! char

1100

(Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 130r 14
not installed).

SET-PICK-APERTURE = EelA int

IA 11

(Level 2): Invalid aperture-width (must range from 0
to 4095).

SET-GIN-CURSOR

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
description of the ENABLE-GIN command for a table of device-function
codes.)

ENABLE-GIN = EciE int int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code.

IEOO

(Level 2): The cursor segment for the specified
device-function code does not exist. (It
has been deleted after the SET-GINCURSOR command which assigned it to
that device-function code.)

IE03

(Level 2): Command is invalid at this time. (The
segment being used as the cursor for the
specified device-function code is a segment which is currently being defined.)

IE10

(Level 2): The specified GIN device is not installed
in the terminal.

IE13

(Level 2): The specified GIN device is already
enabled.

IE21

(Level 2): Invalid number-of-GIN-events. (Must
range from 0 to 65535.)

SET-GIN-STROKE-FILTERING = EelF int int int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
table with the ENABLE-GIN command for
valid device-function codes.)

IFOa

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The tablet
option is not installed.)

IF10

(Level 2): Stroke filtering is not valid for the specified device-function code. (Only allowed
for stroke function.)

IF21

(Level 2): Invalid distance-filter (range is 0 to 4095).

IF31

(Level 2): Invalid time-filter (range is 0 to 32767).

SET-GIN-GRIDDING = EelG int int int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
table with the ENABLE-GIN command for
valid device-function codes.)

IG10

(Level 2): Gridding does not apply to the specified
device-function code. (Gridding is not
allowed for the stroke function.)

IG21

(Level 2): Invalid x-grid-spacing (4112, 4113, 4114,
4116: 0 to 4095; 4115: _231 to 231 _1).

IG31

(Level 2): Invalid y-grid-spacing (4112, 4113, 4114,
4116: a to 4095; 4115: _231 to 231 _1).

= EelC int int

IC13

(Level 2): Graphic input has already been enabled
for the specified device-function code.

IC20

(Level 2): Segment does not exist, or is currently
being defined.

IC21

(Level 2): Invalid segment-number (must range from
Oto 32767).

DISABLE-GIN

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code.

A-6

= EelD int

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

SET-TABlET-HEADER-CHARACTERS = EclH int

IHOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Tablet option is
not installed.)

IH11

(Level 2): Invalid character-set-selector. (Must be 0
or 1; in Setup mode, must be CONTROL
or LETTERS.)

REPORT-TERMINAL-SETTINGS = EclQ char char
No errors are detected for this command.

SET-GIN-RUBBERBANDING = EciR int int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
ENABLE-GIN command for a table of
device-function codes.)

IR10

(Level 2): Rubberbanding does not apply to the
specified device-function code. (Rubberbanding is only allowed for the locator
function. It is not allowed for the pick and
stroke functions.)

SET-GIN-INKING = Eell int int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
description of the ENABLE-GIN command for a table of device-function
codes.)

1110

(Level 2): Inking does not apply to the specified
device-function code. (Inking is not
allowed for the pick function.)

IR21

(Level 2): Invalid rubberbanding mode (must be 0,
1, or 2).

1121

(Level 2): Invalid inking mode (must be 0, 1 or 2).

SET-REPORT-SIG-CHARS = EelS int in! int

1011
Il

SET-REPORT-MAX-LiNE-lENGTH = Eell int

(Level 2): Invalid report-type-code. (Must be a valid
device-function code, or from -1 to -3.)

IL 11

(Level 2): Invalid max-line-length. (Must range from
Oto 65535.)

IS21

(Level 2): Invalid sig-char. (Must range from 0 to
127).

IS31

SET-REPORT-EOM-FREQUENCV = EclM int

(Level 2): Invalid term-sig-char. (Must range from 0
to 127.)

IM11

(Level 2): Invalid EOM-frequency setting (must be 0
or 1).

SET-TABLET-STATUS-STRAP = EclT int

ITOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The tablet
option is not installed.)

IT11

(Level 2): Invalid strap-setting (must be 0 or 1).

SET-GIN-AREA = EelV int int ;(y xy

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function (see ENABLEGIN).

IVOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command; terminal firmware is Version 3 or earlier.

SET-TABLET-SIZE = EelN int

INOO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Requires version 2 or later of Option 13 or 14 firmware.)

IN11

(Level 2): Invalid tablet-size-mode. (Must be 0, 1,
or 2.)

REPORT-GIN-POINT = EciP int

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function code. (See the
description of the ENABLE-GIN command for a list of valid device-function
codes.)

IV03

(Level 3): Out of memory while processing command.

IV21

(Level 2): Invalid window-speciJier(range is -1 to
64).

IE10

(Level 2): The specified GIN device is not installed
in the terminal.

IV31

(Level 2): Invalidfirst-corner (X or Y out of range 0
to 4095).

IE13

(Level 2): A plotter device is not assigned to the
specified port.

IV41

IP13

(Level 2): The device-function code names a device
which has already been enabled for a
different graphic input function.

(Level 2): Invalid second-corner (X or Y out of range
o to 4095, or area is of zero width or
height).

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

,A.-7

ERROR CODES

SET-GIN-WINDOW = EclW xy xy

COpy = EcJC device string device

IWOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command; terminal firmware is Version 3 or earlier.

JC01

(Level 2): Data format error (Options 3A and 9 only).

JC02

IW11

(Level 2): Invalid first-corner (X or Y out of range
_231 to 2 31 _1).

(Level 3): Out of memory while attempting DMA
transfer (Option 3A only).

JC03

IW21

(Level 2): Invalid second-corner (X or Y out of range
_231 to 231 _1).

(Level 2): Attempt to copy an entire disk volume
onto itself (e.g., a copy from FO: to FO:).

JC10

(Level 2): Specified source device is not installed, or
file does not exist.

JC11

(Level 2): Invalid source specifier.

JC12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.

JC13

(Level 2): Parameter 1 context error (not an input
device, or device is busy).

JC19

(Level 2): Disk hardware error or drive not ready on
the source device, or error in DMA block
transfer.

JC20

(Level 2): Separator parameter missing.

JC21

(Level 2): Invalid separator (must be empty string or
TO; in Setup mode, must be TO).

(Level 3): Memory error detected by standard firmware.

JC22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

J 102

(Level 3): Memory error detected by optional
peripheral firmware.

JC30

(Level 2): Specified destination device is not
installed.

J109

(Level 3): Hardware initialization error in option
controller board.

JC31

(Level 2): Invalid destination specifier.

JC32

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.

JC33

(Level 2): Parameter 3 context error. (Invalid destination device, device is busy or full, or
existing disk file is write protected.)

JC39

(Level 2): Disk hardware error or drive not ready on
the destination device, or error in DMA
block transfer.

SET-GIN-DISPLAY-START-POINT = EclX int xy

1011

(Level 2): Invalid device-function parameter. (See
ENABLE-GIN for a table of valid devicefunction codes.)

IXOO

(Level 0): Invalid command; firmware is Version 3 or
earlier.

IX21

(Level 2): Invalid start-point (4112, 4113, 4114,
4116: X = Ot04095, Y = Oto 4095;
4115: X = _2 31 to 231 _1, Y = _2 31 to
2 31 _1).

JO and J1:
J002

Disk System Errors on Power-Up

ACTIVATE-LPOS = EcJ8

JBOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option
42/43/45 or Version 6 or higher not
installed).

JB03

(Level 2): A filename was specified when LPOS was
resident in terminal memory, or a filename
was not specified, but LPOS was active.

JB10

(Level 2): The boot-file was not found.

JB11

(Level 2): Illegal filename.

JB12

(Level 3): Out of memory while performing command.

JB13

(Level 2): Context error (local programmability
already active).

JB19

(Level 2): Disk hardware error (drive not ready, 1/0
error).

A-8

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

".-"--

ERROR CODES

= EcJD device string device

DIRECTORY

JDOO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Disk drive
option is not installed.)

JD10

(Level 2): The specified source device is not
installed or file does not exist.

JD11

(Level 2): Invalid source specifier.

JD12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.

JD13

(Level 2): Context error in parameter 1. (The specified device is not a disk drive, or failed
reading bit map.)

JD19

(Level 2): Disk hardware error (or drive not ready)
for the disk drive whose directory is being
requested.

JD20

(Level 2): Separator parameter missing.

JD21

(Level 2): Invalid separator (must be empty string or
TO).

JD22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter.

STOP-SPOOLING = EcJE
No errors are detected for this command.

= EcJF device

FORMAT-VOLUME

JFOO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Disk drive
option not installed.)

JF10

(Level 2): Device is not installed.

JF11

(Level 2): Invalid device specifier.

JF12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter.

JF13

(Level 2): The device specified is not a disk drive, is
write-protected, is busy, detects a verify
error, detects a bit map error, or is not
mounted.

JF19

(Level 2): Hardware error at the specified disk drive.
(Format error, drive not ready, or writeprotect switch or notch error.)

SET-DMA-BLOCK-SIZE

= EcJH int

JD30

(Level 2): The specified destination device is not
installed.

JHOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 3A is not
installed.)

JD31

(Level 2): Invalid destination specifier.

JH03

JD32

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.

(Level 2): Command received after DMA failed to
power up.

JH11

(Level 2): Invalid parameter (must be from 1 to
65504).

DISMOUNT

JJOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command; firmware is
Version 3 or earlier, or there are no disk
options installed.

JJ10

(Level 2): The device is not installed.

JJ11

(Level 2): Invalid device parameter.

JJ13

(Level 2): Parameter 1 context error (not a valid
device, or device is busy).

JD33

JD39

(Level 2): Parameter 3 context error. (The device
specified is not a valid destination device,
the disk is full, or the file is writeprotected.)
(Level 2): Hardware error for the destination device.
(110 error, write-protect error, disk drive
not ready, or DMA block transfer error.)

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

= EcJJ device

A-9

ERROR CODES

= EcJK device

DELETE-FILE

JKOO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Disk drive
option is not installed.)

JK10

(Level 2): The specified file does not exist or device
is not installed.

JK11

(Level 2): Invalid file-specifier.

JK12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JK13

(Level 2): The specified device is not a disk drive, is
write-protected, is busy, or detects a bit
map error.

JK19

REPORT-DEVICE-STATUS

= EcJQ device

JQ10 (Level 2): Device is not installed.
JQ11

(Level 2): Disk hardware error. (1/0 error, drive not
ready, or hardware write-protect error.)

= EcJL device

(Level 2): Invalid device specifier.

JQ12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

= EcJR device string device

RENAME-FILE

JROO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Disk drive
option is not installed.)

JR10

(Level 2): The specified device or file does not exist.

JR11

(Level 2): Invalid old-filename specifier.

JR12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JR13

(Level 2): Parameter 1 context error (file is writeprotected, device is busy, or command
detects invalid disk format).

LOAD

JL02

(Level 3): Out of memory while performing LOAD
command.

JR19

(Level 2): Nesting error. (LOAD commands are
nested too deeply.)

(Level 2): Disk hardware error. (110 error, drive not
ready, or hardware write-protect error.)

JR20

(Level 2): Separator parameter is missing.

JL10

(Level 2): File or device does not exist.

JR21

JL 11

(Level 2): Invalid source specifier.

(Level 2): Invalid separator (must be empty string or
TO).

JL12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter,
or while executing the command.

JR22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JR30

(Level 2): Either the device specified in parameter 3
does not exist, or is different from the
device specified in parameter 1, or newfilename already exists.

JR31

(Level 2): Invalid new-filename specifier.

JR32

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JR33

(Level 2):

JL03

JL13

(Level 2): Context error in parameter 1. (Not a valid
source device, device is busy, or command detects a disk format error.)

JL19

(Level 2): Device hardware error (disk hardware
error, drive not ready, or DMA block transfer error).

= EcJp device int

PROTECT-FILE

JPOO

(Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Disk drive
option is not·installed.)

JP10

(Level 2): The specified file or disk drive does not
exist.

JP11

(Level 2): Invalid file specifier.

JP12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JP13

(Level 2): Either the specified device is not a disk
drive, or the file (or entire diskette volume)
has been write-protected.

JP19

(Level 2): Disk hardware error. (110 error, drive not
ready, or hardware write-protect error.)

JP21

(Level 2): Invalid write-protect-mode (must be
o or 1).

A-10

P~rameter

3 context error (invalid device

specifier).
JR39

REV, JAN 1984

(Level 2): Disk hardware error. (110 error, drive not
ready, or hardware write-protect error.)

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

SPOOL = EcJS device string device

SET-USER-NUMBER = EcJU int

JS01

(Level 2): Data format error (Options 3A and 9 only).

JUOO

JS02

(Level 3): Out of memory while attempting DMA
transfer (Option 3A only).

(Level 0): Unrecognized command (firmware is
Version 3 or earlier or disk option is not
installed).

JS03

(Level 2): Command context error. (A spooling
operation is already in progress.)

JU11

(Level 2): Invalid user-number (must be 0 to 15).

JS10

(Level 2): Specified source does not exist.

SAVE = EcJV string int string device

JS11

(Level 2): Invalid source specifier.

JV02

(Level 3): Out of memory while attempting DMA
transfer (Option 3A only).

JS12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter,
or while executing the command.

JV01

(Level 2): RAS and RUN are valid for raster terminals only.

JS13

(Level 2): Parameter 1 context error. (Not a valid
source device, or device is busy.)

JV11

JS19

(Level 2): Device hardware error (disk hardware
error, drive not ready, or DMA block transfer error).

(Level 2): Invalid thing-to-be-saved. (Must be MAC,
SEG, RAS, or RUN. The latter two codes
are valid for 4112, 4113, and 4115 terminals only.)

JV12

JS20

(Level 2): Separator parameter is missing.

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter,
or while executing the command.

JS21

(Level 2): Invalid separator (must be empty string or
TO).

JV20

(Level 2): The specified macro or segment does not
exist, or segment is being defined.

JS22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

JV21

(Level 2): Invalid item-number-or-count.

JS30

(Level 2): Specified destination does not exist.

JV31

JS31

(Level 1): Invalid destination device specifier.

(Level 2): Invalid separator (must be empty string or
TO).

JS32

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter,
or while executing the command.

JV32

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

JS33

(Level 2): Parameter 3 context error. (Not a valid
destination, device is busy, or existing file
is write protected or open.)

JV40

(Level 2): The specified destination is not installed.

JV41

(Level 2): Invalid destination specifier.

JV42

(Level 2): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.

JV43

(Level 2): Not a valid destination device, device is
busy, or existing disk file is write protected
or open.

JV49

(Level 2): Device hardware error. (110 error, drive not
ready, hardware write-protect error, or
DMA block transfer error.)

JS39

(Level 2): Device hardware error (disk hardware
error, drive not ready, or DMA block transfer error).

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

A-l1

KO:

Keyboard System Errors

SET-MARGINS = EcKM int

K002

(Level 3): Out of memory while initializing the keyboard system.

KMOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 41140r 4116.)

ENABLE-DIALOG-AREA = EcKA int

KM 11 (Level 2): Invalid number-oj-margins (must be from
1 to 8).

KA 11 (Level 2): Invalid enable-mode (must be 0 or 1).
KN
KC

No errors are detected for this command.
KD

DEFINE-MACRO = EcKD int int-array

KD11

(Level 2): Invalid macro number (must be in range
-32768 to -32742, -32740 to -32737,
-32608 to -32513, or -1 to 32767).

KD21

(Level 2): Invalid int-array (length must be from 0 to
65535, int values must be from 0 to 127).

= EcKE int

SET-ECHO

KE11

(Level 2): Invalid echo-mode (must be 0 or 1).

LFCR

KF11

(Level 2): Invalid LFCR-mode (must be 0 or 1).

HARDCOPY = EcKH int

KH01

(Level 2): Copier fault condition; operator assistance required (Option 9 only).

KH11

(Level 2): Invalid hard-copy-code (must be 0, 1, or
2).

= EcKF int

IGNORE-DELETES = EcKI int

KI11

(Level 2): Invalid ignore-deletes mode (must be
o or 1).

= EcKN int

KN02 (Level 3): Out of memory while attempting to renew
a view. (This error can also occur as a
result of pressing the PAGE key.)(4112,
4113, and 4115 only.)

CANCEL = EcKC

KD22 (Level 3): Insufficient memory to define macro.

RENEW-VIEW

KN10 (Level 2): The view specified does not exist.
KN11

(Level 2): Parameter out of range (must range from
-32768 to 32767).

SET-PAGE-FULL-ACTION

KP11

(Level 2): Invalid page-Jull-action. (Must range from
o to 7.)

REPORT-ERRORS

= EcKP int

= EcKQ

No errors are detected for this command.

= EcKR int

CRLF

KR11

(Level 2): Invalid CRLF-mode (must be 0 or 1).

SET-SNOOPY-MODE

KS11

(Level 2): Invalid snoopy-mode (must be 0 or 1)

SET-ERROR-THRESHOLD = EcKT int

KT11

(Level 2): Invalid error-threshold-level (must be from
o to 4).

RESET = EcKV

= EcKS int

No errors are detected for this command.
KL

LOCK-KEYBOARD = EcKL int

KL 11

(Level 2): Invalid keyboard-lock-mode (must be
o or 1).

A-12

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

EXPAND-MACRO = EeKX int

DRAW-MARKER = EclH }cy

KX11

(Level 2): Invalid macro-number (must be from
-32768 to -32742, -32740 to -32737,
-32608 to -32513, or 0 to 32767).

LH 11

(Level 2): Invalid position (4112,4113,4114, 4116:
X = Ot04095,Y = Ot04095;4115:X =
o to 4095 or _2 31 to 231 _1, Y = 0 to 4095
or _2 31 to 2 31 _1.)

SET-KEY-EXECUTE-CHAR = EeKY int

KY11

(Level 2): Invalid key-execute-char (must range from
o to 127).

SET-DIAlOG-AREA-INDEX = EeLi int int int

L100

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or 4115.)

SET-EDIT-CHARS = EeKZ int int int

L111

KZ11

(Level 2): Invalid char-delete character (must range
from 0 to 127).

(Level 2): Invalid character-index. (Range is 0 to
32767.)

L121

(Level 2): Invalid line-delete character (must range
from 0 to 127).

(Level 2): Invalid character-background-index.
(Range is 0 to 32767.)

L131

(Level 2): Invalid wipe-index. (Range is 0 to 32767.)

(Level 2): Invalid take-literally character (must
range from 0 to 127).

SET-DIALOG-AREA-ALTERNATE-INDEX

LJOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command (terminal is not
Version 4 or later; only valid for 4112,
4113,or4115).

LJ 11

(Level 2): Invalid index (range is 0 to 65535).

INCLUDE-COPY-OF-SEGMENT

LK02

(Level 3): Out of memory while performing
INCLUDE-COPY-OF-SEGMENT. (4112,
4113 and 4115 only).

LK10

(Level 2): Segment does not exist.

KZ21
KZ31

SET-DIAlOG-AREA-BUFFER-SIZE = EeLB int

LB11

(Level 2): Invalid number-oj-lines. (Must range from
2 to 32767.)

= EeLC int

= EeLJ int

= EeLK int

SET-DIALOG-AREA-CHARS

LC11

(Level 2): Invalid number-oj-chars. (4112,4113: 5 to
80; 4114, 4116: 5 to 819; 4115: 5 to 160.)

END-PANEL

LEOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or4115).

LK11

(Level 2): Invalid segment-number (must be -3, -1,
or from 1 to 32767.)

LE03

(Level 1): No panel is currently being defined.

LK13

LE02

(Level 3): Out of memory while performing ENDPANEL command.

(Level 2): The segment specified is currently being
defined.

SET-DIALOG-AREA-UNES = EcLl int

LL 11

(Level 2): Invalid number-oj-lines. (4112, 4113: 2 to
34; 4114, 4116: 2 to 520; 4115: 2to 64.)

SET-DIALOG-AREA-WRITING-MODE

LM11

(Level 2): Invalid writing-mode (must be 0 or 1).

= EcLE

MOVE = EeLF xy

LF11

(Level 2): Invalid position (4112,4113,4114,4116:
X = Ot04095,Y = Ot04095;4115:X =
o to 4095 or _2 31 to 231 _1, Y = 0 to 4095
or _2 31 to 2 31 _1.)

DRAW = EeLG xy

LG11

(Level 2): Invalid position (4112, 4113, 4114, 4116:
X = Ot04095,Y = Ot04095;4115:X =
o to 4095 or _2 31 to 231 _1, Y = 0 to 4095
or _2 31 to 231 _1.)

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

= EclM int

A-13

ERROR CODES

CLEAR-DIALOG-SCROLL = EeLZ

BEGIN-PANEL-BOUNDARY = EeLP xy int

LPOO

(LeveIO): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a 4112, 4113, or a 4115.)

No errors are detected for this command.

LP02

(LeveI3): Out of memory while defining panel.

LP03

(LeveI2): Alphatext is not allowed within apaneldefinition. When this error is detected,
the panel being defined is closed, as if an
END-PANEL command had been
received.

MAOO (LeveIO): Unrecognized command; firmware is
Version 3 or earlier.

LP11

(LeveI2): Invalid first-point (4112, 4113: X = 0 to
4095, Y = 0 to 4095; 4115: X = 0 to 4095
or _231 to 231 _1, Y = 0 to 4095 or _2 31 to
231 _1).

SET-GRAPHTEXT-SLANT = EeMA real

MA11 (LeveI2): Invalid slant-angle (must range from
-32767.0 to 32767.0).
MB

SET-BACKGROUND-INDICES = EeMB int int

MBOO (LeveIO): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115}.

LP21

(LeveI2): Invalid draw-boundary-mode (must be 0
or 1).

MB11 (LeveI2): Invalid text-background-index (must
range from -2 to 32767}.

SET-DIALOG-AREA-SURFACE = EeLS int

MB21 (LeveI2): Invalid dash-gap-index (must range from
-2 to 32767).

LSOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
nota4112, 4113, or4115.)

(Level 2): Invalid surface-number. (4112: 1 to 3;
4113: 1 to 4; 4115: 1 to 8.)

MC11 (Level 2): Invalid value in parameter 1. (4112, 4113,
4114,4116: 1 to 4095; 4115: 1 to 231 _1.)

GRAPHIC-TEXT = EeLT string

MC21 (Level 2): Invalid value in parameter 2. (4112, 4113,
4114, 4116: 1 to 4095; 4115: 1 to 231 _1.)

LT03

(Level 2): Command is invalid at this time
(graphtext is not allowed within a paneldefinition).

MC31 (Level 2): Invalid value in parameter 3. (4112, 4113,
4114,4116: 0 to 4095; 4115: 0 to 231 _1.)

LT11

(Level 2): Invalid array count (must be from 0 to
65535).

LT12

(Level 2): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

LS11

BEGIN-FILL-PATTERN = EeMD int int int int

MDOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or 4115.)
MD02 (Level 3): Not enough memory available for fill
pattern.

SET-DIALOG-AREA-VISIBILITY = EeLV int

LV03

(Level 0): One or more of the dialog area parameters was altered when the dialog area was
made visible.

LV11

(Level 2): Invalid visibility-mode. (Must be 0 or 1.)

SET-DIALOG-AREA-POSITION = EeLX xy

LX11

(Level 2): Invalid position (4115: X or Y out of range
Ot04095).

A-14

SET-GRAPHTEXT-SIZE = EeMC int int int

MD03 (Level 2): Another fill pattern is currently being
defined.
MD11 (Level 2): Invalidfill-pattern-number (must range
from 1 to 32767).
MD21 (Level 2): Invalid pattern-width (4112, 4113: 1 to 32;
4115: 1 to 1280).
MD31 (Level 2): Invalid pattern-height (4112, 4113: 0 to
480; 4115: 0 to 1024).
MD41 (Level 2): Invalid bits-per-pixel (on the 4112, must
be 1, 2, 3, or 6; onthe4113, must be 1, 2,
3,4, or 6; on the 4115, must be 1 to 8).

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

END-FILL-PATTERN

= EcME

MEOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a 4112,4113, or 4115).
MF

SET-GRAPHTEXT-FONT = EcMF int

MF11

(Level 2): Invalidjonl-number (must range from
32767).

a to

= EcMR real

MR11 (Level 2): Invalid angle-in-degrees (must range from
-32767.0 to 32767.0).
MS

MF10 (Level 2): Font is not defined.

SET-GRAPHTEXT-ROTATION

SET-PANEL-FILLING-MODE

= EcMS int int int

MSOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a 4112,4113, or 4115.)
MS11 (Level 2): Invalid overstrike/replace mode (must be
a or 1).

SET-GRAPHICS-AREA-WRiTING-MODE = EcMG in1

MGOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a 4112, 4113, or4115.)
MG11 (Level 2): Invalid writing-mode. (Must be a or 1.)

= EcMI int

SET-PICK-ID

MI03

(Level 2): Command is invalid at this time. (No segment is currently being defined.)

MI11

(Level 2): Invalid pick-number. (Must range from
to 32767.)

MS21

(Level 2): Invalid cover-houndary mode (must be 0
or 1).

MS31 (Level 2): Invalid pattern-keying-mode (must be
from a to 3).

= EcMT int

SET-TEXT-INDEX

MT11

(Level 2): Invalid text-index. (Must range from
65535.)

SET-LINE-STYLE = EcMV int

a to

MV11 (Level 2): Invalid line-style. (Must range from 0 to 7.)

= EcML int

SET-LINE-INDEX

ML 11

(Level 2): Invalid line-index. (Must range from
32767.)

a to

= EcMW int

MW11 (Level 2): Invalid width. (Must be 0 or 1.)

SET-MARKER-TYPE = EcMM int

SELECT-FILL-PATTERN

SET-LINE-WIDTH

MWOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4114 or4116.)

MM11 (Level 2): Invalid marker-number (must be from
a to 10).
MP

SELECT-ALPHATEXT-SIZE-GROUP

= EcMY int

MYOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command (terminal is not a
4114 or 4116).

= EcMP int

MPOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)

MY11 (Level 2): Invalid group (must be either 0 or 1).

MP10 (Level 2): Specified jill-pattern has not been
defined.

MP11 (Level 2): Invalid jill-pattern (must range from
-32768 to 32767.)
MQ

SET-GRAPHTEXT-PRECISION = EcMQ int

= EcMZ int int int

MZOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a41140r4116.)
MZ11

(Level 2): Invalid size-multiplier (must range from 1
to 16).

MZ21

(Level 2): Invalid inter-character-spacing (must
range from to 15).

MZ31

(Level 2): Invalid interline-spacing (must range from
o to 255).

MQ11 (Level 2): Invalid precision mode (must be 1 or 2).

4115B OPERATORS

SET-ALPHATEXT-SIZE

REV, JAN 1984

A-15

ERROR CODES

SET-STOP-BITS = EcNB int

NB11 (Level 2): Invalid number-oJ-stop-bits (must be 1 or
2).
NC

SET-EOM-CHARS

= EcNC int int

NC11 (Level 2): Invalid EOM-char-I. (Must range from 0
to 127.)
NC21 (Level 2): Invalid EOM-char-2. (Must range from 0
to 127.)
ND

SET-TRANSMIT-DELAY = EcND int

ND11 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-delay. (Must range from 0
to 65535.)
NE

SET-EOF-STRING = EcNE int-array

NE11 (Level 2): Invalid EOF-string (must contain from
o to 10 characters, with each character
represented by an int in the range from
Ot0127).

NF11

(Level 2): Invalidf/agging-mode (must be from
o to 4).

NQ11 (Level 2): Invalid queue-size. (Must range from 1 to
65535.)
NR

SET-BAUD-RATES = EcNR int int

NR11 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-data-rate. (Must be 1,50,
75,110,134,150,300,600,1200,1800,
2000,2400,4800,9600, 19200, or
38400.)
NR21 (Level 2): Invalid receive-data-rate. (Must be 0, 1,
50,75,110,134,150,300,600,1200,
1800,2000,2400,4800,9600, 19200, or
38400.)
SET-PROMPT-STRING

= EcNS int-array

NS12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

SET-BREAK-TIME = EcNK int

NK11

(Level 2): Invalid parameter. (Must range from 0 to
65535.)

SET-EOl-STRING = EcNT int-array

NT11

(Level 2): Invalid EOL-string. (The array must hold
from 0 to 2 int parameters. Each int in the
array must be in the range from 0 to 127.)

NT12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

= EcNl int

SET-TRANSMIT-RATE-LiMIT

NL 11

(Level 2): Invalid rate-limit. (Must range from 110 to
65535.)

NQ02 (Level 3): Out of memory while performing SETQUEUE-SIZE command.

NS11 (Level 2): Invalid prompt-string. (Must be an array
holding from 0 to 10 int parameters. Each
of the items in the array must be an int in
the range from 0 to 127.)

= EcNF int

SET-FLAGGING-MODE

NQ01 (Level 3): Not all memory freed from queue.

NE12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
NF

SET-QUEUE-SIZE = EcNQ int

PROMPT-MODE = EcNM int

SET-BYPASS-CANCEl-CHAR = EcNU int

NU11 (Level 2): Invalid numeric equivalent of bypasscancel-character. (Must range from 0 to
127.)

NM11 (Level 2): Invalid prompt-mode (must be 0, 1 ,or 2).
OB
NP

SET-PARITY = EcNP int

NP11

(Level 2): Invalid parity-mode. (Must be from 0 to 4.)

ARM-FOR-BlOCK-MODE

= EcOB int

OBOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)
OB03 (Level 2): The communications queue size is
smaller than the specified input block
size.
OB11 (Level 2): Invalid block-mode-arming parameter
(must be 0 or 1).

A-16

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

SET-BLOCK-CONTINUE-CHARS

= EeOC int int

SET-BLOCK-HEADERS

= EcOH int-array jnt-array

OCOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 1 is not
installed.)

OHOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)

OC03 (Level 2): Command is invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)

OH02 (Level 3): Out of memory while performing
command.

OC11 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-continue-char. (Must
range from 0 to 127.)

OH03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)

OC13 (Level 2): Transmit-continue-char must be
different from block-master-char and

OH11 (Level 2): Invalid char (must be 0 to 127) or array
count (must be in range 0 to 10) in

block-end-char.
OC21

transmit-header.

(Level 2): Invalid receive-continue-char. (Must
from 0 to 127.)

ran~e

OH12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
OH21 (Level 2): Invalid char (must be a to 127) or array
count (must be in range 0 to 10) in receive-

OC23 (Level 2): Receive-continue-char must be
different from block-master-char and

block-end-char.

SET-DUPLEX-MODE

header.
OH22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

= EcOD int

0000 (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 0) is
not installed.) .
0001

(Level 2): Invalid duplex-mode (must be 0 to 3).

SET-BLOCI<-END-CHARS

= EcOE int int

OL03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode).
OL 11

(Level 2): Invalid maximum-line-length. (Must range
from 12 to 65535.)

SET-BLOCK-MASTER-CHARS

OE03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)
(Level 2): Invalid lransmit-end-char. (Must range
from 0 to 127.)

OM03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)

block-continue-char.
(Level 2): Invalid receive-end-char. (Must range from
o to 127.)

OE23 (Level 2): Receive-end-char must be
different from block-master-char and

block-continue-char.

= EcOM int int

OMOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)

OE13 (Level 2): Transmit-end-char must be
different from block-master-char and
OE21

= EcOL int

OLOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 not
installed.)

OEOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 1 is not
installed.)

OE11

SET-BLOCK-LiNE-LENGTH

OM11 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-master-char (0 to 127).
OM13 (Level 2): Transmit-master-char must be
different from block-end-char and

block-continue-char.
OM21 (Level 2): Invalid receive-master-char (0 to 127).
OM23 (Level 2): Receive-master-char must be
different from block-end-char and

block-continue-char.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

A-17

ERROR CODES

SET-BLOCK-NON-XMT-CHARS
int-array

= EcON int-array

OT11

(Level 2): Invalid timeout. (Must range from 0 to
65535 seconds.)

PORT-ASSIGN

PAOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)

PA11

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier. (Must be PO:, P1:,
or P2:.)

PA12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter

PA13

(Level 2): Port is in use.

PA21

(Level 2): Invalid protocol identifier. (Must be
PPORT, 4643, 4662, 4662/MP, 4662/NT,
4663, 4663/NB, 4663/NT, or KATA).

PA22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing parameter.

SET-PORT-STOP-BITS

ON03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)
ON11 (Level 2): Invalid character code or array count in
transmit-chars. (The array count must be
from 0 to 20, and the character codes
must be from 0 to 127.)
ON12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
ON21 (Level 2): Invalid character code or array count in
receive-chars. (The array count must be
from 0 to 20, and the character code must
be from 0 to 127.)
ON22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
SET-BLOCK-PACKING

= EcOT int

OTOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)

ONOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)

SET-BLOCK-TIMEOUT

= ECOP int int int int

OPOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)

= EcPA device string int

= EcPB device int int

PBOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)

OP03 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be armed for block mode.)

PB11

OP11 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-unpacked-bits (must be 7
or 8).
OP21 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-packed-bits (must be 6, 7,
or 8).

(Level 2): Port identifier is invalid (must be PO:, P1:,
or P2:).

PB12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
PB13 (Level 2): Port is busy.

OP31 (Level 2): Invalid receive-unpacked-bits (must be 7
or8).

PB21

(Level 2): Invalid number-of-stop-bits (must be
for 2).

OP41 (Level 2): Invalid receive-packed-bits (must be 6, 7,
or 8).

PB31

(Level 2): Invalid number-of-data-bits (must be 5,6,
7, or 8).

SET-BLOCK-LENGTH

= ECOS int int

0800 (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (Option 01 is
not installed.)
0803 (Level 2): Command invalid at this time. (Terminal
must not be or armed for block mode.)
0811 (Level 2): Invalid transmit-block-length (must range
from 5 to 65535.)
0821 (Level 2): Invalid receive-block-length (must range
from 5 to 65535.)

,/
I,

A-18

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

PORT-COPY

= ECPC device string device

= EcPF device int int

PCOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed).

SET-PORT-FLAGGING-MODE
int

PFOO

PC02 (Level 3): Out of memory while processing
command.

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)

PF11

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PF12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PF13

(Level 2): Port is busy.

PF21

(Level 2): Invalid/lagging-mode (must be 0, 1 or 2).

PF31

(Level 2): Invalid GO character (must be in range 0
to 127).

PF41

(Level 2): Invalid STOP character (must be in range
o to 127; if non-zero, must be different
from the GO character).

MAP-INDEX-TO-PEN

PIOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)

PI02

(Level 3): No memory is available for the index map.

PC32 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PI11

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PC33 (Level 2): Destination is busy or is a peripheral port
that is not assigned the PPORT protocol.

PI12

(Level 2): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PI13

(Level 2): Port is busy.

PI21

(Level 2): Invalid index (must range from -1 to 255).

PI31

(Level 2): Invalid pen-number (must range from 0 to
255).

REV, JAN 1984

A-19

PC10 (Level 2): Source device does not exist.
PC11

(Level 2): Invalid source (must be HO:, PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PC12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parSing the
parameter.
PC13 (Level 2): Source is busy, or is a peripheral port that
is not assigned the PPORT protocol.
PC21

(Level 2): Invalid separator. (Must be the empty
string or TO.)

PC22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parSing the
parameter
PC30 (Level 2): Destination device is not installed.
PC31

(Level 2): Invalid destination (must be HO:, PO:, P1:
or P2:, and must be different from the
source port).

= EcPE device int-array

SET-PORT-EOF-STRING

PEOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed).

PE11

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PE12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PE13

(Level 2): Port is busy.

PE21

(Level 2): Invalid EOF-string. (The int-array must
have from 0 to 10 elements, and each int
in the array must be in the range from 0 to
127.)

= EcPI device int int

PE22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

= EePL string device

REPORT-PORT-STATUS

= EePQ device

PLOT

PLOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)

POOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed).

PL02

(Level 3): Out of memory while attempting DMA
transfer (Option 3A only).

P011

PL11

(Level 2): Invalid separator. (Must be the empty
string or TO.)

P012 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PL12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PL20

(Level 2): Destination device not installed.

PL21

(Level 2): Invalid destination specifier

PL22

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PL23

(Level 2): Parameter 2 context error. (Device is write
protected or busy.)

PL29

(Level 2): Device hardware error (disk drive is not
ready or is write-protected, or DMA block
transfer error).

SET-PORT-EOL-STRING

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

SET-PORT-BAUD-RATE

= EePR device int

PROO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed).
PR11

(Level 2): Invalid port identifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PR12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
PR13 (Level 2): Port is busy.
PR21

(Level 2): Invalid baud-rate (must be 50, 75, 110,
134,150,300,600,1200,1800,2000,
2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, or 9600).

SET-COLOR-COPIER-DATA-RESOLUTION
int

= EePM device int-array

PMOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed.)
PM11 (Level 2): Invalid port identifier. (Must be PO:, P1:,
or P2:.)

= EeQB

0800 (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
installed).
0811 (Level 2): Invalid resolution (must be 1 or 2).

PM12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

PM13 (Level 2): Port is busy.

SELECT-HARDCOPY-INTERFACE

= EeQD int

0000 (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
il"!stalled).

PM22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

0011 (Level 2): Invalid interJace (must be 0 or 1).
PP

SET-PORT-PARITY

= EePP device int
QN

PPOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Option 10 is
not installed).
PP11

(Level 2): Invalid port specifier (must be PO:, P1:, or
P2:).

PP12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

SET-NUMBER-OF-COPIES

= EeQN int

ONOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
installed).
ON11 (Level 2): Invalid number-oj-copies (must be 0 or
65535).

PP13 (Level 2): Port is busy.
PP21

(Level 2): Invalid parity-mode (must be in range 0 to
4).
;'-

A-20

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

SET-iMAGE-ORIENTATION = EeOO int

flO

SET-SURFACE-DEFINITIONS = EeRD jnt-array

0000 (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
installed).

RDOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or 4115.)

0011 (Level 2): Invalid orientation (must be from 0 to 3).

RD10 (Level 2): Occupied undefined surface. (This command would have resulted in a dialog
area viewport, pixel viewport, or numbered graphic viewport residing on an
undefined surface.)

REPORT-COLOR HARDCOPY-STATUS = EeOQ

0000 (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
installed).

SET-COPIER-RESERVE-STATUS

RD11

= EeQR int

OROO (Level 0): Unrecognized command (Option 9 is not
installed).

(Level 2): Invalid surface-defs array. (4112: array
count: 1 to 3; ints: 0 to 3; 4113: array
count: 1 to 4; ints: 0 to 4; 4115: array
count: 1 to B; ints: 0 to B.)

RD12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

OR03 (Level 2): Color copier is not connected.
QR11 (Level 2): Invalid reserve-setting (must be 0 or 1).
RA

SET-VIEW-ATTRIBUTES

SET-BORDER-VISIBllITV = EeRE int

REOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RE11

(Level 2): Invalid border-visibility-mode parameter
(must be 0, 1, or 2).

SET-FmUP-LEVEL

RFOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or4115.)

RF11

(Level 1): Invalid fixup-level (must range from 0 to
32767).

SET-SURFACE-GRAY-LEVELS = EcRG int jnt-array

= EeRA int int int

RAOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)
RA10 (Level 2): Surface does not exist (has not
been defined with SET-SURFACEDEFINITIONS command).
RA11

(Level 2): Invalid surface-number. (4112: -1 to 3;
4113:-1 t04;4115:-1 toB.)

RA21

(Level 2): Invalid wipe-index. (Must range from 0 to
65535.)

RA31

(Level 2): Invalid border-index. (Must range from 0
to 65535.)

SET-BACKGROUND-GRAY-LEVEL = EeRB int

RBOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or 4115.)
RB11

(Level 2): Invalid gray-level (must range from 0 to
100 or 1000 to 1100).

SELECT-VIEW = EeRC int

RGOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or 4115.)
RG10 (Level 2): Surface does not exist (has not been
defined with a SET-SURFACE-DEFINITIONS command).
RG11

(Level 2): Invalid surface-number. (4112: -1 or 1 to
3; 4113: -1 or 1 to 4; 4115: -1 or 1 to B.)

RG21

(Level 2): Invalid surface-gray-levels array. (The
array count must be even; the first int in
each pair must be a color index in the
range from 1 to 32767; the second int in
each pair must be a valid gray-level: a
number from 0 to 100 or 1000 to 1100.)

RCOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or 4115.)
RC11

(Level 2): Invalid view-number. (Must range from-1
to 64.)

41158 OPERATORS

= EcRF int

RG22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

REV, JAN 1984

A-2'1

ERROR CODES

SET-PIXEL-BEAM-POSITION = EcRH xy

RUNLENGTH-WRITE = EcRL int-array

RHOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RLOO (Level 2): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or 4115.)

RH11 (Level 2): Invalid beam-position (4115: _2 31 to
2 31 _1).

RL 11

(Level 2): Invalid runlength-code array. (The array
count must range from 0 to 65535, and
each int in the array must also range from
o to 65535 on a 4112 and 4113, and from
Ot0231 -10na4115.)

SET-SURfACE-VISIBILITY = EcRI int-array

RIOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RI10

(Level 2): A surface in surJace-numbers-and-visibilities does not exist (has not been defined
with a SET-SURFACE-DEFINITIONS
command).

(Level 2): Invalid surJace-numbers-and-visibilities
array. (Surface numbers: 4112: 1 to 3;
4113: 1 to 4; 4115: 1 to 8. Visibility: 0 to 2
for all terminals. Array count must be
even and range from 2 to 65534.)

RN10 (Level 2): Surface does not exist (has not been
defined with a SET-SURFACE-DEFINITIONS command).

RI11

RL 12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the parameter, or while executing the command.
SET-SURfACE-PRIORITIES = EcRN int-array

RNOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RI12

(Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

RN11 (Level 2): Invalid priorities array. (Surfaces: 4112: 1
to 3; 4113: 1 to 4; 4115: 1 to 8. Priorities:
4112: 0 to 4; 4113: 0 to 5; 4115: 0 to 9.)

LOCK-VIEWING-KEYS = EcRJ int

RN 12 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

RJOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RASTER-WRITE = EcRP int char-array

RJ11

(Level 2): Invalid locking-mode (must be 0 or 1).

RPOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)

DELETE-VIEW = EcRK int

RP11

(Level 2): Invalid number-oj-pixels. (Must range
from 0 to 65535.)

RP21

(Level 2): There are too many or too few pixels in
the code-array, or invalid codes are
present (range for codes is ADE 32 to 96).

RKOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)
RK10 (Level 1): The designated view does not exist (has
not been defined with a SELECT-VIEW
command).
RK11

(Level 2): Invalid view-number (must range from -1
to 64).

RP22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
RQ

SET-VIEW-DISPLAY-CLUSTER = EcRQ int-array

ROOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
nota4112, 4113, or4115).
R011 (Level 2): Invalid view-numbers array. (Each view
number must range from -2 to 64; array
count must be from 0 to 65535.)
R012 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

A-22

REV,JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODeS

RECTANGLE-FILL = EcRR xy xy int

RROO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)
RR11

(Level 2): Invalid first-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0 to
639, Y = 0 to 479; 4115: X = 0 to 1279, Y
= 0 to 1023.)

RR21

(Level 2): Invalid second-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0
to 639, Y = Ot0479;4115:X = Ot01279,
Y = 0 to 1023.)

RR31

(Level 2): Invalid fill-index (must range from 0 to
65535.)

SET-PIXEL-VIEWPORT = EcRS xy xy

RSOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112, 4113, or 4115.)

RS 11

(Level 2): Invalid first-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0 to
639, Y = 0 to 479; 4115: X = 0 to 1279, Y
= 0 to 1023.)

RS21

(Level 2): Invalid second-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0
t0639,Y = Ot0479;4115:X = Ot01279,
Y = 0 to 1023.)

SET-PI){EL-WRITING-FACTORS = EcRT int int int

RTOO

(Level 0): Unrecognized command. (Terminal is not
a4115.)

RT11

(Level 2): Invalid pixel-width parameter (range is
-1280 to 1280).

RT21

(Level 2): Invalid pixel-height parameter (range is
-1280 to 1280).

RT31

(Level 2): Invalid major-axis parameter (must be 0
or 1).

BEGIN-PI){EL-OPERATIONS = EcRU int int int

RUOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)
RU 10 (Level 2): Surface does not exist (has not been
defined with a SET-SURFACE-OEFINITIONS command).
RU11

(Level 2): Invalid surface-number. (4112: -1 to 3;
4113:-1 t04;4115:-1 t08.)

RU21

(Level 2): Invalid ALU-mode (4112,4113: 0 to 16;
4115:0,7,11,12,15,17,or18).

RU31

(Level 2): Invalid bits-per-pixel. (4112: 0,1,2,3, or
6; 4113: 0, 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 6; 4115: 0 to 8.)

41158 OPERATORS

SET-VIEWPORT

= EcRV xy xy

RVOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)
RV01

(Level 2): Invalid viewport size. (In the 4112 and
4113, the viewport must not be more
than 51.2 times larger than the current
window.)

RV11

(Level 2): Invalid first-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0 to
4095, Y = Ot03071;4115:X = Oto
4095, Y = 0 to 3276.)

RV21

(Level 2): Invalid second-corner. (4112, 4113: X = 0
to 4095, Y = 0 to 3071 ; 4115: X = 0 to
4095, Y = 0 to 3276.)

SET-WINDOW = EcRW }ty xy

RWOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a4112, 4113, or4115.)
RW01 (Level 2): Invalid window size. (In the 4112 and
4113, the viewport must not be more
than 51.2 times larger than the current
window.)
RW11 (Level 2): Invalidfirst-corner (4112,4113: X = 0 to
4095, Y = 0 to 4095; 4115: X = 0 to 4095
or _2 31 to 2 31 _1, Y = 0 to 4095 or _2 31 to
2 31 _1).
RW21 (Level 2): Invalid second-corner (4112,4113: X = 0
t04095,Y = Ot04095;4115:X = Oto
4095 or _2 31 to 2 31 _1, Y = 0 to 4095 or2 31 to
2 31 _1).
RX

PIXEL-COPY = EcR){ int xy xy xy

RXOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
nota4112, 4113, or4115.)
RX 10 (Level 2): The specified destination-surface does
not exist.
RX11

(Level 2): Invalid destination-surface. (4112: -1 to 3;
4113: -1 to 4; 4115: -1 to 8.)

RX21

(Level 2): Invalid destination-lower-left-corner.
(4112,4113:X = Ot0639, Y = Ot0479;
4115: X = Oto 1279, Y = Oto 1023.)

RX31

(Level 2): Invalidfirst-source-corner. (4112, 4113:
X = Ot0639,Y = Ot0479;4115:X = 0
to 1279, Y = Oto 1023.)

RX41

(Level 2): Invalid second-source-corner. (4112,
4113:
X = 0 to 639, Y = 0 to 479; 4115: X
to 1279, Y = Oto 1023.)

REV, JAN 1984

A-23

ERROR CODES

SET-SEGMENT-ClASS = EcSA int int-array int-array

BEGIN-NEW-SEGMENT = EcSE int

SA03 (level 2): Command invalid at this time: the specified segment is currently being defined.

SEOO (Level 0): Unrecognized command (the terminal
firmware is version 1 or 2).

SA 10 (Level 2): Segment does not exist.

SE02 (Level 3): Not enough memory to begin segment, or
out of memory while ending segment.

SA11
SA21

{Level 2): Invalid segment-number. (Must be in the
range from -3 to -1, or from 1 to 32767.)
(Level 2): Invalid removal-array. (Each class number must be -1 or from 1 to 64; array
count must be from 0 to 65535.)

SE10 (Level 2): Segment already exists.

SA22 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
SA31

(Level 2): Invalid addition-array. (Each class number must be -1 or from 1 to 64; array
count must be from 0 to 65535.)

SA32 (Level 3): Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
SB

(Level 2): Invalid segment-number (1 through 32767
are valid).

SET-GRAPHTEXT-FONT-GRID = EcSG int int int

SG10 (Level 2) Font already exists.
SG11 (Level 2) Invalid font-number (must range from 0 to
32767).

BEGIN-lOWER-SEGMENT = EcSB

SG21 (Level 2) Invalid grid-width. (Must range from 1 to
4095.)

S800 (Level 2): The indicated segment already exists.

SG31 (Level 2) Invalid grid-height. (Must range from 1 to
4095.)

(Level 2): Invalid for next lower segment number
(current segment 10 is 1).

S802 (Level 3): Not enough memory to begin segment, or
out of memory while ending segment.
S803 (Level 2): Context error; command is invalid at this
time. No segment is currently being
defined, or a graphtext character is currently being defined.
SC

SE11

SG02 (Level 3) Out of memory while defining font grid.

S800 {Level 0): Unrecognized command (the terminal
firmware is version 1 or 2).

S801

SE03 (Level 2): Command is invalid at this time (a
graphtext character or a panel is currently
being defined without a segment being
defined).

SET-SEGMENT-HIGHLIGHTING = EcSH int int

SH03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)
SH10 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.
SH11 (LeveI2) Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to -1 , or from 1 to 32767).

END-SEGMENT = ECSC

SH21 (LeveI2) Invalid highlighting (must be 0 or 1).

SC02 {Level 3): Out of memory while performing command (4112, 4113,4115 only).
SC03 (Level 1): Invalid at this time: no segment is currently being defined.
SO

SET-SEGMENT-DETECTABILITY = EcSD int int

S003 (Level 2): Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)
S010 (LeveI2): Segment does not exist.
S011

(Level 2): Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to -1 , or 1 to 32767).

S021

(LeveI2): Invalid detectability (must be 0 or 1).

A-24

REV, JAN 1984

('-

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

= EcSI int

SET-SEGMENT-IMAGE-TRANSFORM
real real real )(y

SI02

(Level 3) Out of memory while transforming
segment.

SI03

(Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)

SET-SEGMENT-WRITING-MODE

= EcSM int int

SM03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.
SM10 (Level 2)

Segment does not exist.

SM11 (Level 2)

Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to 32767).

SM21 (LeveI2)

Invalid writing-mode (must be 0 or 1}.

SI10

(Level 2)

Segment does not exist.

SI11

(LeveI2)

Invalid segment-number (must range -3 to
-1, or 1 to 32767).

SI21

(LeveI2)

Invalid x-scale-factor. (Must range from
-32767.0 to 32767.0.)

SNOO (LeveIO)

SI31

(Level 2)

Invalidy-scale-factor. (Must range from
-32767.0 to 32767.0.)

SNOO (LeveI2) The indicated segment already exists.

SI41

(LeveI2)

Invalid rotation-angle. (Must range from
-32767.0 to 32767.0.)

SI51

(Level 2)

Invalid position. (4112,4113,4114,4116:
X = Ot04095, Y = Ot04095;4115:X =
o to 4095 or _231 to 231_1 ; Y = 0 to 4095
or_231 t02 31 -1.)

SI<

DELETE-SEGMENT

SI\!

SN01

SK10

(Level 1) Segment does not exist.

SK11

(Level 2)

Invalid segment-number (must be -3, -1,
or from 1 to 32767).

SK13 (LeveI2) Segment specified is an active
GIN-cursor.
SET-CURRENT-MATCHING-CLASS
array int-array
(Level2)

= EcSL int-

Invalid inclusion-set. (Class numbers
must be -1 , or from 1 to 64; the array
count must be from 0 to 65535.}

SL12

(Level 3) Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.

SL21

(Level 2)

SL22

Invalid exclusion-set. (Class numbers
must be -1 , or from 1 to 64; the array
count must be from 0 to 65535.)

(LeveI3) Out of memory while parSing the
parameter.

41158 OPERATORS

Unrecognized command (the terminal
firmware is version 1 or 2}.

Invalid for next higher segment number
(current segment ID is 32767).
Not enough memory to begin segment, or
out of memory while ending segment.

SN03 (LeveI2)

No segment is currently being defined, or
a graphtext character is currently being
defined.

= EcSI( int

SK02 (Level 3) Out of memory while attempting to delete
a segment (4112, 4113. 4115 only).

SL 11

(LeveI2)

= EcSN

SN02 (LeveI3)

BEGIN-HiGHER-SEGi'II1ENT

BEGIN-SEGMENT

= ECSO int

SOOO' (LeveI4)

Segment transform error. Scale-factor
cannot be 0, segment scaled out of window, or window decreased beyond scaled
segment.

S002 (Level 3)

Not enough memory to begin segment, or
out of memory while defining segment.

S003 (Level 2)

Another segment, a graphtext character,
or a panel is currently being defined.

SOlO (LeveI2)

Segment already exists.

S011

(Level 2)

Invalid segment-number (must range from
1 to 32767).

SET-PIVOT-POINT

SP11

(Level 2)

= ECSP)(y

Invalid pivot-point (4115: X and Y must
be from _231 to 231_1).

Although error 5000 starts with the opcode SO, it is not caused by the Begin
Segment (EeSO) command, but by the interaction of the Set-Segment-ImageTransform (EeSI) and the Set-Window ("cRW) commands. Error 5000 cannot be
suppressed by setting the error threshold to 4. (See the 4110 Series Command
Reference Manualfor more information.)

REV, JAN 1984

A-25

ERROR CODES

REPORT·SEGMENT·STATUS

= Ecsa jnt char·array

S010 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.
S011 (Level 2) Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to 32767).
S021 (Level 2) Invalid array of codes. (Must include only
the uppercase letters A, D, H, I, M, P, S, V,
and X. Also, the array count must be in
the range from 0 to 65535.)
S022 (Level 3) Out of memory while parsing the
parameter.
SR

RENAME·SEGMENT

= EcSR jnt jnt

BEGIN·GRAPHTEXT·CHARACTER

= EcST jnt int

ST02 (Level 3) Out of memory while defining graphtext
character, or not enough memory to begin
the definition.
ST03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (A
graphtext character is currently being
defined.)
ST10 (Level 2) The/ont specified has no grid defined for
it.
ST11

(Level 2) Invalid/ont number (the range is from 0 to
32767).

ST20

SR02 (Level 3) Out of memory while renaming a segment
(4114,4116 only).

(Level 2) The character specified has already been
defined in this/onto

ST21

SR03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)

(Level 2) Invalid character number (the range is
from 32 to 126).

END·GRAPHTEXT·CHARACTER

SR10 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.
SR11

(Level 2) Invalid old-segment-number (must range
from 1 to 32767).

SR20 (Level 2) A segment with the old-segment-number
already exists.
SR21

(Level 2) Invalid new-segment-number(must range
from 1 to 32767).
5ET·5EGMENT·DI5PLAY·PRIORITY

= Ec55 jnt int

= ECSU

SU03 (Level 1) This command is invalid at this time. (No
graphtext character is being defined.)
SV

5ET·SEGMENT·VI5IBILITY

= Ec5V int

SV02 (Level 3) Out of memory while performing command (4112, 4113, 4115 only.)
SV03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)

SS03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (The
specified segment is currently being
defined.)

SV10 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.
SV11

(Level 2) Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to 32767).

SS10 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.

SV21

(Level 2) Invalid visibility (must be 0 or 1).

SS11

(Level 2) Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to -1 , or from 1 to 32767).

SS21

(Level 2) Invalid priority-number (must range from
-32768 to 32767).

A-26

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

ERROR CODES

SET-SEGMENT-POSITION

= EeSX int xy

SET-SURFACE-COLOR-MAP

= EeTG int int-array

SX02 (Level 3) Out of memory while performing command.

TGOO (Level 0) Unrecognized command. (The terminal is
not a 4112,4113, or 4115).

SX03 (Level 2) Command is invalid at this time (the specified segment is currently being defined;
4112,4113,4115 only).

TG 10 (Level 2) Surface does not exist (has not been
defined with a SET-SURFACE-DEFINITIONS command).

SX10 (Level 2) Segment does not exist.

TG11

(Level 2) Invalid surface-number. (4112: -1,1 to 3;
4113: -1,1 to 4; 4115: -1,1 to 8).

TG21

(Level 2) Invalid color-mixtures array. (The array
count must be a multiple of four in the
range from 0 through 65532. The first int
in each group be from 0 to 32767. The
other three ints must be valid HLS, RGB,
or CMY values, according to the most
recent SET-CaLOR-MODE command. If
the HLS system is in effect, the Hue
parameter must be in the range from
-32768 to + 32767, while the Lightness
and Saturation parameters must be in the
range from 0 to 100. If the RGB or CMY
system is in effect, then the first two color
coordinates must be in the range 0 to 100,
and the third color coordinate must be in
the range from 0 to 100 or 1000 to 1100.
In a 4115, if the Machine RGB system is
in effect, the first two color coordinates
must be in the range from 0 to 255, and
the third color coordinate must be in the
range from 0 to 255 or 1000 to 1255.)

SX11

(Level 2) Invalid segment-number (must range from
-3 to 32767.)

SX21

(Level 2) Invalid position (4112, 4113, 4114, 4116:
X = Ot04095, Y = Ot04095;4115:X =
oto 4095 or _2 31 to 231 _1; Y = 0 to 4095
or _2 31 to 231 _1.)

DELETE-GRAPHTEXT-CHARACTER

SZ03

(Level 2) Command is invalid at this time. (A
graphtext character is currently being
defined.)

SZ10

(Level 1) The specified font does not exist (no grid
has been defined for that font).

SZ11

(Level 2) Invalid font-number (must range from -1
to 32767).

SZ20

(Level 1) The character specified does not exist in
this font.

SZ21

(Level 2) Invalid char-number. (Must be -1, or from
32 to 126.)

SET-8ACI 62
?

78
79

Y121

z
{

123

I
124

108

}

'"'v

125

109

110

126

0
95

122

106
107

105

I
92

\
76

104

[

119

x120

I
89

W
103

118

102

X
Z

117

116

u
101

115

100

W
Y

114

e
85

113

q
r

P112

9
58

B26 * 42

C 27

F
F
F 12 S

)

Q81

6
39

(

LOWERCASE

@
48

$
&

y 22

UPPERCASE

K21

33
/I

S
E

Til

F 10
V

P32

N
5

FIGURES

BITS

111

T'27
4665-42

41158 OPERATORS

D-1

ASCII CHARTS

TableD-2
CHARACTERS USED IN CHAR PARAMETERS

87 86

BITS

84 83 82 81

000

001

0 1

011

101

1 1~

11 1

r-__~____-r__~0~____-r___0~____~__~~~____~
CONTROL

FIGURES

UPPERCASE

LOWERCASE

4665-43

D-2

4115B OPERATORS

ASCII CHARTS

Table D-3
CHARACTERS USED IN I NT PARAiVlETERS

Hil Characters

Lol Characters

P
IJr,I

II:'

a I q
q

s
'Iq~

I ) 'J

d I
JprlJ

_lUi

u
;,','

IIH

w
119

4665-44

41158 OPERATORS

0-3

ASCII CHARTS

Table 0-4
CHARACTERS USED IN INT-REPORT PARAMETERS

Hil-Report Characters

Lol-Report Characters

4665-45

0-4

4115B OPERATORS

ASCII CHARTS

TableD-5
CHARACTERS USED IN XY PARAMETERS

HiY, HiX Characters
87 86

0 00

BITS

0 1 0

1 1

6~S~22

1 11

1 0

0
1

1 0 1 0
1 0 11
11
11
11
11

F 10

VT 11

113

114

115

LoY, Extra Characters

1 1 0

1 0

P112

--'Kl

Q81

LOWERCASE

o0
1

NU ()
1

UPPERCASE

FIGURES

CONTROL

f!483S,BI

y o

E
M 25
S

~26
E
C 27

DL 16 S!' 32

D117

1 49

1 0

D2'8

,14

o1 o

0 11
0

D3'9

D
_ 4'0

1;5
36

G
o 1 C
~_,) ___ I-°H1 _Oi_l-1--_~ KZ! 37
R 13 S 29
&
1-----'4---£j''''''~?8--"""!'M--N
A 0 1 1 0 AK 6 S
S
R
_~ 22 --~
1 0
S 30
78
E
o1 1 1
U
S
39
11
_~3

°14
I

S 31

2
50

3 51
__
4
--5 52

Et'8 U 84
69

LoX Characters

1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1

4665-46

41158 OPERATORS

D-5

ASCII CHARTS

Table 0-6
CHARACTERS USED IN XV-REPORT PARAMETERS

87 86

°0

BITS

84 83 82 81

CONTROL

FIGURES

1 0

1 1

\
64

LOWERCASE

UPPERCASE

NU a

P112

S
99

d
84

100

111

E
69

F
70

4665-47

0-6

41158 OPERATORS

The following optional keyboards are available for the terminal. For information on how to install these optional keyboards, see the 4115B Service Manual. The viewing keys
and thumbwheels are not shown in the keyboard illustrations.

ICJICllulol
F1

IlJIOlolol
F5

O~T~OU\]

4A: UNrulE[D

K~NGDOM

~(JEVf8lOAPJ[i)
This option permits the terminal to change to a United Kingdom keyboard layout so that the United Kingdom characters
are displayed. The only change is that the "#" sign is
replaced by the English "£" sign. When this key is pressed
(or the appropriate code received by the terminal), the "£"
sign is displayed on the screen. The revised keyboard configuration is shown in Figure E-1 and the revised ASCII code
chart is shown in Table E-1.

CLEAR
KYBD
LOCK

PAGE
FULL

XMT

RCV

DIALOG
AREA

CANCEL

SETUP

LOCAL

HARD
COpy

4665·52

Figure E-1. United Kingdom Keyboard.

41158 OPERATORS

E-1

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

Table E-1

UNITED KINGDOM CHARACTER SET

B6 B5

BITS

0 0 10 10

10 0 0

SH
10

10 0
!0

10 10
0

10
10
10

Sx
Ex
ET
Eo

10
11

0
1
2
3

3 19

4 20
N

K21

S
6

aL 7

BELL

10 10 10

I~~K~~ 8

10 10 11

Y22

Ea 23
CN

1
1

!1 10

%
37

&
38

/
39

(

E
. M25

) 41

T 11 EC
0 ;0 F
F 12 FS
0

F 10 Sa

1 1

0
1

3
4

5
6

7
8

@
64

48
49
50
51
52

B
C

65
66
67

D
68

F
~

' 44

< 60

=61
> 62

U
S 31

100

115
116

117

v
21JJ.

1111

t2Q

105

YL21

flO

J~§
k

92
93

101

P112
Qjil
r

g1jJ~
h

]

77
78

JJQ

[

d
85

Y
74

Q 81
R

' 59

I
57

LOWY

E
53
54

LOW X

RETU~13 Gs 29 S
o 14 RS 30 .
15

S
I

* 42 ·· 58

0 1 0 L
0

D
S
L 16 P 32
D
1 17
33
D
2 18 " 34
D
D

HIGH X & Y
GRAPHIC INPUT

CONTROL

B4 B3 B2 Bl

10 0

94
95

W
1~

z
J22.

{

tOl

108

m109
n

110

} 125

Jl~

0
111

TLlZ
4665-48

E-2

41158 OPERATORS

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

OPTION 4C: SWEDISH KEYBOARD
This option changes the standard keyboard configuration to
a Swedish layout and allows Swedish characters to be displayed. There are 17 changes to the keyboard, with three of
these changes being new alphabet characters. When these
seventeen keys are pressed (or the appropriate codes are
received by the terminal), the corresponding characters are
displayed on the screen. The revised keyboard configuration is shown in Figure E-2 and the revised ASCII code chart
is shown in Table E-2.

OPTION 4F: DANISH/NORWEGIAN
KEYBOARD
This option changes the standard keyboard to a Danish/
Norwegian layout so that the Danish/Norwegian characters
are displayed. There are 17 changes to the keyboard, with
three of the changes being new alphabetic characters.
When these 17 keys are pressed (or the appropriate codes
are received by the terminal), the corresponding characters
are displayed on the screen. The revised keyboard configuration is shown in Figure E-3 and the revised ASCII code
chart is shown in Table E-3.

CLEAR

1c=J1c=J1c=J1c=J1
F1

1c=J1c=J1c=J1c=J1
F5

KYBD
LOCK

PAGE
FULL

XMT

RCV

1c=J1c=J1c=J1c=J1
DIALOG
AREA

CANCEL

SETUP

LOCAL

HARD
COPY

4665-53

Figure E-2. Swedish Keyboard.

1c=J1c=J1c=J1c=J1
F5

KYBD
LOCK

PAGE
FULL

XMT

RCV

1~1c=J1~1c=J1
DIALOG
AREA

SETUP

LOCAL

HARD
COPY

4665-54

Figure E-3. Danish/Norwegian Keyboard.
41158 OPERATORS

E-3

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

TableE-2
SWEDISH CHARACTER SET

B7 B6 B5
BITS

B4 B3 B2 B1

000

001

0 10

011

100

101

1 10

11 1

t-----'------t-H-IG-H-'-X-&-y--+-----'---+-----'------I
CONTROL

GRAPHIC INPUT

LOW X

LOW Y

L 16
33

o2 18

4665-49

(
'-.. -.

E-4

41158 OPERATORS

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

Table E-3
DANISH/NORWEGIAN CHARACTER SET

B7B6

i 84

!10

1--

BITS
83 82 81

0 -0 - - 0 (0
0
1

0 1

-"0 1 - 1
1

l
ii 0

S/'(

i0010

0 1 1~
~

E'J(

2
D3

0100

1 0

1 1

18
19

4
NK

A
49

3
51
4

1 1 1 ],'

Y.J

q113 II

d
84

114

i
I

1151

t
I

100

a 97

\ 96JP':1

esc
0

P 80
Q81

B
50

'"
~

0 1

1 1 no

HIGHX&Y

0 48 @ 64

~=F~APHI~=_U=T=9_~~L=0"FW_X_=-I_ _L=-;OW Y

NU 0 DL 16 SP32
II 0 0 0 1 !I' S
H 1 O
-I 17 l 33
!I
'
(0 (0

1161

101

11711

1~_-+-r~ ___~6+-__~2~2__~3=8~__=541-__~7~0r-__~86 ___ ~10=2+-~1~18~1

u_--t--t--+--il,BELL

1 0 0 0

BAC~-S

SPACE

1 0 0 1

CN
24

(

8 56

HT
57

1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1

9
10

T 11

S
8

C 27
F
S 28
G

S 29

so 14

R
S 30

S
I

S 31

60
61

/
47

75··

L 76

106

X
120

1211

z
..ae122

107

123

108

124

flJ

105

119

M
N

104

103

K
43

RETURN13

* 42

109

1\
78

110

111

125

rv
126
RU80UT
(DEL)

127
4665-50

41158 OPERATORS

E-5

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

OPTION 4K: KATAKANA KEYBOARD
This option enables selection of either English or Katakana
characters for entry and display. The key in the lower left
hand corner (Caps Lock, on the standard keyboard) controls character set selection. Pressing this key toggles the
character set. The keycap light indicates the active character set: on indicates Katakana character set and off indicates English character set. The Caps Lock function is
moved to the unshifted SETUP key and only has an effect
with the English character set. Shift-SETUP is required to
select setup mode. Setup mode only has meaning with the

English character set; therefore, setup mode selection
causes the English character set selection. Pressing the
Break key also causes English character set selection. The
SETUP key light indicates both caps lock and setup mode in
the following manner:
off
on (steady)
on (fast blink)
on (slow blink)

no setup mode and no caps lock
no setup mode and caps lock
setup mode and no caps lock
setup mode and caps lock

The revised keyboard configuration is shown in Figure E-4
and the revised ASCII code chart is shown in Table E-4.

SETUP

\c=J\c=J\c=J\c=J1
Fl

\c=J\c=J\c=JIc=J1
F5

KYBD
LOCK

PAGE
FULL

XMT

RCV

1~1~1C:S1c=J1
DIALOG
AREA

CAPS
LOCK
(STEADY)

LOCAL

HARD
COPY

4703-01

Figure E·4. Katakana Keyboard.

E-6

41158 OPERATORS

OPTIONAL KEYBOARDS

Table E-4
KATAKANA CHARACTER SET

SHIFT IN

87 86

00
85

BITS

CONTROL

84 83 82 81

" " " " NUL

SOH 1
o 0 1 0 STX
2
1 1 ETX
" 0
3
" 1
" " EOT 4
" 1 " 1 ENQ
5
1 0 ACK
" 1
6
1 1 BEL
" 1
7
1 0 o 0
BS
g~X~E 8
1 0 o 1
HT
9
0
LF
1 " 1
10
1 0 1 1
VT 11
1 1
FF
" 0
12
1 1 01
CR 13
1 1 1 0
SO 14
1 1 1 1
SI 15
o0

0 1

" 1

BELL

RETURN

OLE16
DCl17
DC218
DC319
DC4
20
NAK
21
SYN
22
ETB23
CAN
24
EM
25
SUB
26
ESC
27
FS
28
GS 29
RS 30
US 31

SP 32
I
33
II

I
11 I

a
1

45
46

]

NUL
0
a
q
SOH1
97
113
STX
b
r
98
114
2
c
s ETX
3
99
115
EOT
d
t
4
700
116
e
u ENQ
5
701
117
f
v ACK
102
6
118
g
w BEL
7
103
119
h
x BS
104
120 ~~X~E 8
I
HT
Y
105
121
9
z
LF
J
70
106
122
{
VT
k
11
107
123
FF
I
I
124
108
12
}
CR
m109 125
n
SO 14
"-'
110
126
RU80UT
0
SI 15
(DELI
96

P112

BELL

RETURN13

111

0 1

CONTROL

92
93

0
63

[
75

Z
74

> 62

X
73

43
44

I
57

* 42

83
84

F
55

)

Q81

38
39

65
66

(

00
1

"
\

1 1
1

10
""

ALPHANUMERIC

SHIFT OUT

127

01
1

11
1

KAT AKANA

11
1

OLE SP ~
... 80
16
32
48
64
DCl17 . 33 7 49 7- 65 .b. 81
DC218 r 34 150 '/ 66 ~ 82
DC319 --135 ?
T
.::c 83
51
67
DC4 , .I
lT-' 84
20
36
52
68
-j.:L.
NAK
21
37
53
69
85
-iJ
3
SYN '7
~

ETB

CAN
24
EM

40
41

.:t=-

55
56

I)
72

J/;
73

SUB26 I 42 ::J ) ) 74 V
58
90
[]
ESC ;;t if
I::: 75
27
43
59
91
FS ~ Y
7
?
44
28
60
76
92
GS 29 .:1 45 A 61 '" 77 :...- 93
,,'"
RS 30 3 46 i!
62
78
94
US 31 'J 47 ~ 63 '";'f 79 0 95

4703·02A

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

E-7

The following seven examples will help you become familiar
with some of the features of your terminal. You don't need to
go through all of the examples in one sitting or do all of them
in the order in which they are shown. However, whenever
you work through any of them, you should do Example 1
first, since it sets up the terminal so that the examples will
work as shown. You will also need to do Example 4 (in which
segments are created) before Examples 5 or 6 (in which the
segments are manipulated).
These examples provide a few simple and quick exercises
to familiarize you with the terminal. Therefore, most commands are used with very little explanation. References are
made to the manuals where complete explanations can be
found. These examples are also found in the brochure

Setup commands are shown in uppercase characters so
they can be easily distinguished from the rest of the text.
However, setup commands can be entered in uppercase or
lowercase. You can use the Caps Lock key (press it so the
light in it is on) to cause all alphabetic characters to be
uppercase.
Escape sequence commands used in Setup mode (as in
Examples 4-7) must be entered in uppercase, as shown.
In several examples, you are told to toggle the DIALOG key.
That means to press the DIALOG key once to turn the dialog
area off, and then press it again to turn the dialog area back
on.

Introducing Your4115B Computer Display Terminal.The
command words for all setup commands are completely
spelled out in the examples. They can, however, be abbreviated to as few characters as necessary to distinguish them
from other commands (usually two or three characters).

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-l

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

EXAMPLE 1 - GETTING READY

Dothis if the power is already on. Press the MASTER
RESET button (Figure F-2). The terminal goes through
the power-up self-test procedure. Within about 15 seconds the screen erases and the cursor appears on the
screen.

So that the examples in this brochure will execute as
shown, reset the terminal to its factory default operating environment. To reset it, do the following:

Do this example before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described.
1.

If the power is already on, skip to Step 2.
If the power is not already on, press the POWER switch
(Figure F-1). A green indicator is visible in the switch
when you release it; the lights in the keyboard blink on
and off as the terminal goes through the power-up procedure, during which it tests certain parts of itself to be
sure it is ready for operation. In about 15 seconds, the
screen is erased and the cursor appears. If an error
message is displayed or the cursor does not appear,
See Appendix B.
Goto Step 3.

Figure F-1. The POWER Switch.

F-2

REV. JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Figure F-2. The MASTER RESET and SELF TEST Buttons.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F·3

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION
/

Press and hold the SELF TEST button.

Continue to hold SELF TEST while you press and
release the MASTER RESET button.

Release the SELF TEST button.

The indicator lights in the keyboard flash and in a
few seconds the terminal bell rings. Within 20 seconds after the bell rings, enter Ctrl-C: That is, press
and hold down the Ctrl key while you press and
release the C key, then release the Ctrl key. Within
about 15 seconds, a menu appears on the screen
(Figure F-3A).

Press the key labeled F2. Another menu (Figure F38) appears. CMOS is an acronym for the kind of
memory used to store the terminal's operating
environment.

Press the key labeled F1. The message shown in
Figure F-3C is displayed below the menu. CMOS
Reset means that the operating environment has
been reset to its factory default condition.

Now enter Ctrl-E. In a few seconds, the screen is
erased and the cursor appears again.

Figure F-3. Sell Test Menus.

F-4

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Press the DIALOG key (Figure F-4). Tl-Ie light in the key
comes on and the dialog area becomes visible. Even
though it is visible, you can't see anything in it since it
has not yet been enabled.

Press the SET UP key (Figure F-4). The light in the key
comes on and an asterisk appears at the left margin,
next to the cursor.

Enter the following setup command to enable the dialog area (the c R means press the Rtn key, Figure F-4).
DAENABLE YES c R

Now that it is both visible and enabled, the cursor and
asterisk appear in the dialog area.
7.

The brightness of the display is controlled by the
INTENSITY control (Figure F-5). Turn the knob to the
right to make the display brighter, to the left to make it
dimmer. Set the brightness to a desirable level.

Press the Page key (Figure F-4). This erases the part of
the screen that is not displaying the dialog area. The
dialog area is not erased.

Figure F-S. INTENSITY Control.

Press the CLEAR key (Figure F-4) by pressing Shift and
DIALOG at the same time. This erases the dialog area
but has no effect on the non-dialog portion of the
screen.
Now the cursor is blinking on the first line of the dialog
area, but nothing else is on the screen.

DIALOG/CLEAR

Page

Rtn

4665-58

Figure F-4. Page, DIALOG/CLEAR, SET UP, and Rtn keys.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-5

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

EXAMPLE 2 - MANIPULATING THE
DIALOG AREA
Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described.
This example introduces some of the commands used to
manipulate the dialog area. It also includes other general
setup commands, how to adjust the brightness level, and
how to use the thumbwheels to view the contents of the dia·
log area.
1.

The STATUS setup command reports all or part of the
current terminal operating environment. This example
illustrates various forms of the STATUS command.
Enter the following STATUS command for a report (Fig·
ure F·6) of which keys are assigned for editing.

The report lists three characters, the first of which rep·
resents the terminal's character·delete character. The
box means that the current character·delete key is Rub
Out. If you make a mistake when typing a setup com·
mand, press the Rub Out key to back up along the cur·
rent line. Characters are deleted as the cursor
backspaces.
The second character is the line·delete key. The eN
means the ASCII cancel character is currently the line·
delete character (this is not the same as the CANCEL
command key). If you want to delete an entire line, type
the cancel character by entering Ctrl·X. The cursor
moves back to the beginning of the line, erasing the
entire line as it does so.
The third character in Figure F·6 is called the literal
character. It is discussed in Example 3.

STATUS EDITCHARS c R

STArus EDITCHARS
EDITCHARS. • • • • • • • •• • 'it -

•

4222·26

Figure F·6. STATUS EDITCHARS Report.

F·6

. REV, JAN 1984

41156 OPERATORS

eXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Enter the following command for a status report on all
communications parameters (the result of the command is shown in Figure F-7).

The dialog area is set to display five lines at a time;
since the status report is more than five lines long, you
cannot see all of it.

STATUS COMMUNICATIONS c R

SREA~TIME_ ......... 258
SypASSCANCEL ....... ~

4222·27

Figure F-7. Result of STATUS COMMUNICATIONS Command.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-7

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Rotate the right thumbwheel (Figure F-B) down to scroll
through the dialog area so you can examine the rest of
the contents of the dialog buffer.
3.

Enter the following command to increase the visible
portion of the dialog buffer:
DALINES 20 c R

Toggle the DIALOG key; now 20 lines of the dialog
buffer are visible (Figure F-9).

Figure F-B. The Thumbwheels.

*STATUS COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
BAUDRATE •••••.....• 2488 2488
XMTLIMIT........... 19289
STlJPB ITS. • • • • • . • • •• 1
XMTDELAY •..•••..•.. 1B8
PARITY ..•.••••..•.. NONE
PROMPTSTRING ••....• "
PROMPTMDDE ••••.•..• NO
GUEUESIZE ••.••...•• 3B8
FLAGGING •.........• NONE
EOMCHARS ..••.•••.•. ~ ~
EOLSTRING •.••.••••• '~'
EOFSTRING. _•••.• '" "
BREAKTIME .......... 2B8
BypASSCAl'lCEl.... • • • • ••

.OALDIES 28

4222-28

Figure F-9. Adjusted Dialog Display of STATUS COMMUNICATIONS Report.

F-8

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

The following commands affect the dialog area by
reducing the length of lines and relocating it. Toggle the
DIALOG key after entering these commands to update
the dialog area.

To change the dialog area back to its previous orientation, enter the following commands and then toggle the
DIALOG key:
DALINES 5 C R
DAPOSITION 0 0 c R

DACHARS 25 c R
DAPOSITION 1000 1000 c R

DACHARS 80 c R

The factory default dialog area is located such that its
lower-left corner is at the lower-left corner of the screen
(0,0). It is now relocated (Figure F-1 0) so that the dialog
area's lower-left corner is at point (1000,1000).

~<1'fTLIMIT.

Press the Page and CLEAR keys to erase the entire
screen.

• • • • • • • • •• 19200

STOPBITS •••••.••••. 1

XMTDELAY ........... lBB
PARITY. • . • • • • . • • • ••
PROMPTSTRING •••••••
PROMPTMODE •••••••••
QUEUESIZE •.•.••.•..
FLAGGING .•••..••.••
EOMCHARS • • • • • • • • • ••
EOLSTRING ••.•••••••
EOFSTRING ••••••••••
BREAKTIME ••••••••••
BypASSCANCEL .......

NONE
"
NO

3BB
NONE
'J. ...
''It'

2BB
...

t:OALINES 2B
lOACHARS 25
lOAPOSITIDN laSe lB6B
t

4665-61

Figure F-10. Relocated Dialog Area.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-9

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

EXAMPLE 3 KEYS

PROGRAMMING

Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described.

Now press the key labeled F2; the terminal executes
the STATUS command. Figure F-11 shows the result of
that command as well as the entire sequence of commands in this example.

To delete all macros currently programmed into the
keys, enter the DEFINE command in the following form:

Most keys can have one or two macros (character strings
and/or commands) programmed into them. When a macro
is programmed into a key, the key is expanded to generate
that macro when you press it.
1.

Enter the following command to increase the visible
extent of the dialog area and then toggle the DIALOG
key to update the dialog area:

DEFINE ALL c R

Macros are also deleted when the terminal is turned off
or reset.
7.

Reduce the visible extent of the dialog area to five lines
by entering the following command and then toggling
the DIALOG key:

DALINES 20 c R

DALlNES5 c R

Enter the following command to program the key
labeled F1 to mean "STATUS EDITCHARS":

Press the Page key and then the CLEAR key to erase
the screen.

DEFINE F1 'STATUS EDITCHARS' c R

In this command, be sure to type in the characters "F",
"1". This DEFINE command creates a macro and associates it with key F1. There are many variations of the
DEFINE command. See Section 6 for details.
3.

Press the key labeled F1. The alphabetic string "STATUS EDITCHARS" appears on the screen.
Now press the Rtn key and the terminal executes the
STATUS EDITCHARS command.

Notice the third character in the edit character report
(Figure F-11). This is called the literal character.
The literal character is used when you want to include
in a macro a character that would normally be executed, such as a carriage return. For example, a key
can be programmed to not only display a character
string, but to execute that command because a carriage return is included in the macro.

Figure F-11. Results of Programming a Key.

To program the key labeled F2 to display and execute
the STATUS EDITCHARS command, enter the following:
DEFINE F2 'STATUS EDITCHARS - CR' c R

When you type the literal character, it is displayed;
when you press the Rtn key, the cursor backspaces and
types cR over the literal character. Type a single closing
quote to end the macro and then press Rtn again to terminate the command.

F-10

REV. JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAIVIPLES OF OPERATION

After you have entered these commands, press the
Page key. Pressing Page permanently erases vectors
that are not part of a segment. Vectors included in a
segment are erased briefly and then redrawn.

EXAMPLE 4 !ENTER~NG GRAIPH~CS

AND ESCAPE
SEQUENCE COMMANDS
2.

Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described.
This example introduces four concepts:

For example, if you made a mistake in drawing Segment 1, delete it and start over by entering the following
commands:

o Use of escape sequence commands in Setup mode
o Local graphics
o Color graphics

ECSCCR
EcSK 1 cR

o Panels
Graphics are typically generated by a host-resident program, and escape sequence commands will not generally
be used locally. However, there may be times when you
want to create graphics locally, as illustrated in this example. This is also an easy way to create the segments used in
Examples 5 and 6.
1.

If you make a mistake entering the coordinates, the terminal draws to the wrong point. If that happens, you
should close the segment, delete the segment, open
another segment with the same name, and start over.

The first command closes the open segment and the
second command deletes it from the terminal's memory. Then go back to Step 1 and enter the correct commands.
3.

Enter the following series of escape sequence commands exactly as shown. Press the key labeled Esc to
enter the EC character. The next two characters are the
command op-code; these must be entered in uppercase; there is no space between the first three characters. Then enter a space and the numeric parameters
with a space between each parameter (except the last
command, which has no parameter). Terminate each
command with a carriage return.

The following series of commands draws the roof outline and then fills in the roof with a cyan color (Figure
F-12B). Note the action of each LG command.
Ec MP_5 c R
EcS02 cR
EcLP 900 1435 1 cR
EcLG 1750 2000 cR
EcLG 2600 1435 cR
EcLE c R
ECSC cR

There is no visible result for the first three commands.
The series of commands draws the frame of a house
(defined as a panel) and fills it with a blue color. Figure
F-12A is a black and white representation of the result.
EcMS 0 0 0 c R
Ec MP_4 c R
ECSO 1 c R
EcUR 1000 750 2500 1500 c R
ECSCCR

A panel is simply an enclosed area. The first command
in the preceding sequence specifies how the terminal
will fill in panels. The second command specifies that
the panel should be filled with blue. The third command
opens a segment named 1. That means that all subsequent commands become part of Segment 1, continuing until Segment 1 is closed. The fourth command
draws a rectangle with lower left corner at (1000,750)
and upper right corner at (2500,1500). The last command closes Segment 1 and then the panel is filled.

41156 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-11

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

This next series of commands draws the left window of
the house (Figure F-12C). The first command specifies
the panel filling color to be green. The second command opens Segment 3; the third draws the rectangle;
the fourth closes the segment.
Ec MP_3 c R

cS03cR

EcUR 1100 950 1300 1200 cR
ECSCCR

The door, filled with red (Figure F-12D):
EcMP-2 c R

cS04 cR

EcUR 1425 750 1675 1200 cR
ECSCCR

And finally the right window, filled with white
(Figure F-12E):

cR
cR

ECMP-1
EcS05

EcUR 1800 950 2400 1200CR
ECSCCR

Press the Page and CLEAR keys. This erases vectors
from the screen that are not saved in segments and
erases the dialog area.

4222-31

Figure F-12. Graphic Displays Created by Escape Sequence Commands.

F-12

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

1E){AMPllE 5) - MAN~IPUlA1"~NG A
SEGMENT AND lUJS~NG V~fEW~NG
KEVS
Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described. The
segments used in Example 5 are created in Example 4.
There are many ways to manipulate segments. Steps 1 and
2 illustrate ways segments would normally be manipulated
by a host program. See the 4110 Series Command Reference
Manual and 4110 Series Host Programmers Manual for
details.

D
4222-32

Steps 3-9 illustrate how to use the ZOOM, PAN, VIEW, and
RESTORE keys. All of the viewing keys are explained in
Section 2 of this manual.
1.

Figure F-13. Display with Invisible Segment.

Make the right window of the house invisible by entering the following command:
ECSV 5 0 c R

Press the Page key. The segment containing the frame
of the house is not deleted from memory, but it is no
longer visible on the screen (Figure F-13).
Make it visible again by entering the following command and then pressing the Page key.
ECSV 51 c R

You can highlight the house's door with the following
command. The terminal highlights the door by blinking
it off and on.
EcSH 41 c R

Figure F-14. The Viewing Keys.

Turn the highlighting feature off by entering the following command:
EcSH 4 0 c R

Press the SET UP key to exit from Setup mode. Press
the DIALOG key to make the dialog area invisible.

Press the ZOOM key (Figure F-14) to make the zoom
function of the viewing keys active. Aframing box
appears at the edge of the screen, with the lower-left
and upper-right corners of a rectangle in the center of
the box (Figure F-15).

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-13

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Figure F-15. Display with Framing Box for ZOOM.

F-14

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Rotate the top thumbwheel down or the bottom
thumbwheel to the left to decrease the size of the framing box, as shown in Figure F-16.

4665·64

Figure F-16. Adjusted Framing Bo)( for ZOOM.

4115B OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-15

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Press the PAN key to make the pan function of the viewing keys active. The framing box remains on the screen
in the same position, but it now has a cross in its center
(Figure F-17).

When you rotate the top thumbwheel up or down, the
framing box moves up or down. When you rotate the
bottom thumbwheel to the left or right, the framing box
moves to the left or right.

Figure F-17. Framing Box with Crosshair for PAN.

F-16

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

In Figure F-18, the framing box has been repositioned.

4665·66

Figure F-18. Repositioned Framing

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

80)(

for PAN.

F-17

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Use a combination of zooms and pans to position the
framing box as shown in Figure F-19. First use the
zoom function to make the box the appropriate size,

then the pan function to position the box. You can use
either function alternately by pressing the appropriate
key.

Figure F-19. Framing Box After ZOOM and PAN.

F-18

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

When you have the box positioned, press the VIEW key
(Figure F-14). The view is updated to display just the
contents of the framing box (Figure F-20).

Press the RESTORE key (Figure F-14) by pressing the
Shift and VIEW keys at the same time. This restores the
original view.

You can continue to experiment with the ZOOM and
PAN functions. When you are finished, press the
OVERVIEW key (Shift-PAN). Then press either the
ZOOM or PAN key, depending on which one is lit.

10. Press the DIALOG key to make the dialog area visible
again. Press Page and then CLEAR to erase anything
on the screen that is not saved in a segment.

Figure F-20. Display Updated with VIEW.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-19

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

EXAMPLE 6 - USING THE DISK
DRIVE AND 3PPI
Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described. The
segments used in Example 6 are created in Example 4.
Example 6 illustrates the use of the optional disk drive and
the three-port peripheral interface (3PPI).
NOTE

Be sure that the disk you use for this example is one
that does not contain information that you want to
save. Thefirst step in the exampleformats the disk,
which effectively erases any information already
stored on it.
1.

Press in on the door bar (Figure F-21) to open the disk
drive. If the disk you are going to use has a write-protect notch, be sure that it is covered. Insert a disk as
shown in Figure F-22. Press down on the disk drive
door until it snaps closed. Press the WRITE PROTECT
switch so that the red light above the switch is off.

Enter the following command:
FORMAT FO: cR

It takes about a minute for the terminal to format the
disk. During that time, the light in the disk door is on,
indicating that the disk is operating. When the disk is
formatted, the light turns off.
3.

Enter the following command to save all existing segments into a file named HOUSE.
SAVE SEG ALL TO FO:HOUSE cR

B. On the M4115B

4665·89

Figure F-21. Disk Drive Door Bar.

F-20

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Delete all segments from the terminal's memory (but
not from the disk) with the following command:
EcSKALL c R

Press the Page key. Since the segments are no longer
stored in terminal memory, they are erased.
To restore the file containing the house segments, enter
the following command:
LOAD FO:HOUSE c R

The LOAD command reads the specified file and executes it as a command file. The house is redrawn as
five individual segments just as it was before.
5.

Save each segment into an individual file with the following commands:
SAVE SEG 1 TO FO:FRAME c R
SAVE SEG 2 TO FO:ROOF c R
SAVE SEG 3 TO FO:LWINDOW c R
SAVE SEG 4 TO FO:DOOR c R
SAVE SEG 5 TO FO:RWINDOW c R

A. On the 41159.

Delete all segments again:
EcS~(ALL

Press Page to erase the screen.
6.

Enter the DIRECTORY command for a listing of all files
on the disk. Use the top thumbwheel to scroll the dialog
area to observe the directory contents.
DIRECTORY FO: c R

Restore each part of the house individually:
LOAD FO:FRAME c R
LOAD FO:ROOF c R
LOAD FO:LWINDOW c R
LOAD FO:DOOR c R
LOAD FO:RWINDOW c R

Figure F-22. Inserting a Disk.

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

F-21

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

The following commands delete individual parts of the
house. This command deletes the frame of the house:

EXAMPLE 7-USING GRAPHIC
INPUT

EcSK1 cR
Do Example 1 before doing any of the others, since it sets
up the terminal so examples will operate as described.

This command deletes the roof:
Ec SK2 c R

This command deletes the left window:
EcSK3 c R

EclEO 1 cR

This command deletes the door:
Ec SK4

Press the SET UP key to exit from Setup mode (the
light in the key should go off). Move the crosshair cursor by rotating the thumbwheels. The top thumbwheel
moves the horizontal line of the crosshair, the bottom
thumbwheel moves the vertical line of the crosshair.
The intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines is
the point that is sent to the program.

And this command deletes the right window:
EcSKScR

Enter the following command for Graphic Input mode
using the crosshair cursor to locate one point:

If you have the 3PPI and a 4662 or 4663 Plotter, you
can plot this display. First use an RS-232 cable to connect the plotter to a 3PPI port. Then assign a device
driver and set up the port for the plotter. For example,
the following commands assign the 4663 device driver
to Peripheral Port 1 and set the port's parameters so it
can display a file from the disk drive:

Press the Shift key at the same time you rotate a
thumbwheel. Notice that the cursor moves much more
slowly. This allows you to be very precise in locating a
point on the screen.
Press any alphanumeric key. The terminal transmits the
pOint you located. GIN Mode is terminated because it
was only initialized to locate one point.

PASSIGN P1: 4663 cR
PBAUD 1 200 cR
PBITS 1S C R

2.
Set the switches on the bac,k of the 4663 to 2, 2, 2, and
3, respectively. Now copy the segments on the plotter
through the 3PPI with the following command:
COPY FO:HOUSE TO P1: cR
10. After the plot is complete, press the Page and CLEAR
keys to erase the screen.

Press the SET UP key again to put the terminal back
into Setup mode, then enter the following commands:
Ec ML2 c R
EclEO S cR
Ecll 0 1 cR

The first command specifies the line color to be red.
The second command puts the terminal into GIN Mode
until you locate five points. The third command initializes a function called inking. With inking in use, the terminal draws a line from the last pOint located to the next
point you specify.
Exit from Setup mode by pressing the SET UP key.
Move the crosshair around the screen and locate (specify) a point by pressing an alphanumeric key. Nothing is
visible when you locate the first point. As you locate the
next four points, the terminal draws lines between
them. The crosshair disappears after you locate the
fifth pOint.
To terminate the inking feature, put the terminal back
into Setup mode and enter the following command:
Ecll 00 cR

F-22

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

EXAMPLES OF OPERATION

Press the Page key to erase the graphics area of the
screen. Now enter the following commands:

E cML4 c R
EclE 0 5 c R
EclR 0 1 c R

EcML 7 c R

The first command specifies the line color to be blue.
The second command puts the terminal into GIN mode
until you have digitized five points; the third command
initializes the rubberbanding feature. The rubberband
is a line from the last point located that follows the
crosshair cursor as it moves.

EclEO 10 C R
Ecll 0 1 c R
EclR 0 1 c R

Exit Setup mode by pressing SET UP.
Move the cross hair cursor around the screen and
locate ten points. As you move the cursor around, the
rubberband line follows it. When you press an alphanumeric key to input a point, the rubberband segment is
"inked in."

Press SET UP to exit from Setup mode. Use the
thumbwheels to position the crosshair cursor and press
an alphanumeric key to locate a point. Now when you
move the cursor again, a line follows the cursor around
the screen. When you press an alphanumeric key to
locate another paint, the rubberband disappears; as
you move away from that point again, the rubberband
again follows the cursor. Repeat until the crosshair
cursor disappears.

Press SET UP again to enter Setup mode. Change the
line color back to white and turn off rubberbanding and
inking by entering the following commands:
EcML 1 c R
EcllOOc R

Put the terminal back into Setup mode and turn rubberbanding off by entering the following command:
EclROO c R

41158 OPERATORS

Press the page key to erase the graphics area of the
screen. Enter the following commands to change the
line color to yellow and to put the terminal in GIN mode
until you have digitized ten points, with both inking and
rubberbanding in effect:

EclR 0 0 c R

REV, JAN 1984

Press Page and then CLEAR to erase the screen.

F-23

APrPeU11d]ux G

100%-

COLOR S1fAN[»A!RfD)
In the HLS color coordinate system,
the color space is represented as a
double-ended cone.
The HUE coordinate runs
counterclockwise around the
cone. (0 to 360 degrees.)

0°

180°

The LIGHTNESS coordinate runs
vertically up the cone. (0% to 100%.)

- - ' - - - - 300°
90°

The SATURATION coordinate runs
radially outward from the axis of
the cone. The SATURATION coordinate
is a percentage of the maximum
possible saturation at a particular
180°
LIGHTNESS level. (0% to 100%.)

0°

en
en
w

::;:::
l-

HUE

Yellow 180°

0° Blue

1800

NOTE: For clarity, this figure
shows the cone divided into only
64 colors, as in the TEKTRONIX
4027 terminal. The 4115B terminal has a wider repertory of color
mixtures.

(!J
~

0°

1800

0°

Figure G-1. The HLS Color Cone.

0%
41158 OPERATORS

G-1

TEKTRONIX
COLOR
STANDARD
Overview:

Saturation:

The world of color is filled with ambiguous
terminology, i.e. intensity, purity, value, etc.
Many color users feel that "color theory" is a
prerequisite to operating color systems; T.V.,
Videotaping, Photography, Computer Graphics.
In order to end this confusion, Tektronix has
developed a color language and function
based on human engineering, rather than
machine engineering. Below is a description
of this system, which will provide a clear
and concise means for understanding how
color is defined and how our syntax was
derived.

Color Concepts:
Color selection is specified by hue, lightness and saturation which is the HLS
method. The definitions are as follows:
Hue:

The characteristic associated with a color name
such as red, yellow, green,
blue, etc. Hue is a gradation of color advanced by
degrees, thus represented
as an angle from 0 to 360.

Lightness:

The characteristic that allows the color to be
ranked on a scale from
dark to light. Lightness is
expressed as a parameter
ranging from 0 to 100%
with black being 0 (bottom of cone) and white
being 100% (top of cone).

The characteristic which
describes the extent to
which a color differs from
a gray of the same lightness. Saturation is expressed as percentage,
ranging from 0% (maximum white content at that
lightness level) to 100%
(full saturated).

Geometrically, colors can be described in
terms of a double cone.
Variations in lightness are represented
along the axis, with white at the apex of
the cone and black at the opposite apex.
Variations in saturation are represented by
radial distances from the lightness axis, in
constant lightness planes. Hue is represented as an angular quantity from a known
reference point.

Copyright © 1982 by Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon.
Printed in the United States of America. All rights reserved.
Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form
without permission of Tektronix, Inc. U.S.A. and foreign TEKTRONIX products covered by U.S. and foreign patents and/or
patents pending.
TEKTRONIX is a registered trademark for Tektronix, Inc.

This appendix contains ordering information for standard
and optional terminal accessories that will normally be of
use to an operator. There are other accessories that will be
of use only for servicing and adjustment of the terminal. For
those accessories, refer to the parts list in the 4115B Service Manual, Volume 2.

4115B Introduction Brochure
4115B Computer Display Terminal
Operators Manual
4110 Series Host Programmers Manual
4110 Series Command Reference Manual
4110 Series Reference Guide
Power Cord
Host Port RS-232 Cable
Function Key Overlays (Set of 6)
Display Cables
BNCcable
control cable

41158 OPERATORS

070-4663-00
070-4665-00
070-4664-00
070-3892-00
070-4715-00
161-0123-00
012-0911-00
334-3290-02
012-0074-00
012-0525-00

OIPT~ONAl ACCESSOR~ES

For Operation
Function Key Overlays (Set of 6)
Flexible Disks (One-Sided,
Double Density)
Host Port Loopback Connector
4115B Option 3A DMA Interface
Instruction Manual
4110 Series F13/14 Graphics Tablet
Instruction Manual
119-0977-01/03 Flexible Disk Drive
Instruction Manual
4925 Dual 5.25-lnch Flexible Disk Drive
and 4926 10M Byte Hard Disk Drive
Instruction Manual

334-3290-02
119-1376-01
067-1 043-00
070-4761-01
070-3814-00
070-2504-01

070-4688-01

For Service
4115 Service Manual, Vol. 1
4115 Service Manual, Vol. 2
M4115B Electronics Module Service
Manual
640-0219-01 Display Module Service
Manual
ECC RAM Service Manual
411 OF09 (Interface for 4690 Series
Color Graphics Copiers)
Service Manual
020-0313-00/01 Three Port Peripheral
Interface (4110 Series Option 10)
Service Manual
4110 Series Disk Options Service
Manual
411 OB Series Option 45 Mass Storage
Interface Service Manual
119-1644-00 10M Byte Hard Disk Drive
Service Manual
(for M4115B Option 46 or 47)
4115B Display Module Adjustment
Graticule Instructions
Test Graticule Calibration Fixture
Extender Board Calibration Fixture
Flexible Extender Board Calibration
Fixture
HRC Logic Extender Board Calibration
Fixture

REV. JAN 1984

070-4666-00
070-4667-00
070-5007-00
070-4668-01
070-4701-00

070-4497-00

070-3815-00
070-3812-00
070-4811-00

070-4731-00
062-7233-00
067-1142-00
067-1005-00
067-1163-00
067-1173-00

H-1

4115B/M4115B terminal
accessories H-1
compatible products 1-6
display module 2-24
features 1-2
general description 1-2
options 1-5
related manuals 1-1
495314954 emulation 6-70
accessories, terminal H-1
Additive color mode 6-20
active tablet area 6-70
ADE 6-7
alphanumeric keys 2-11
alternate color index 6-24
ANSI mode 6-21
ANSI mode errors A-29
arm for Block mode 6-14
array parameter type 6-7
ASCII code charts
standard 0-1
with character parameters 0-2 to 0-6
for optional keyboards E-2 to E-7
ASCII decimal equivalent (see ADE)
ASCII keys 2-11
aspect ratio 2-21 , 2-22
attaching the graphics tablet 3-26
autoconvergence 1-2, 2-8
Automatic Request To Send (Half Duplex mode) 6-34
Autorepeat feature 2-10
Back Space key 2-13
baud rate 5-2
BAUDRATE 5-2,6-11
BCONTINUECHARS5-5,6-12
BENDCHARS 5-5,6-12
BHEADERS5-5,6-13
bias, how to restore 3-29
BLENGTH 5-5, 6-13
BLiNELENGTH 5-5, 6-14
block data packing 5-6, 6-16
block header sequence 5-5, 6-13
block length 5-5, 6-13

41158 OPERATORS

block line length 5-5, 6-14
block master characters 5-6, 6-15
Block mode 5-5, 6-14
Block mode non-transmittable characters 6-15
block timeout 5-6, 6-17
block-continue characters 5-5, 6-12
block-end characters 5-5, 6-12
BLOCKMODE 5-5, 6-14
blocks (data transmission) 5-5
blocks (disk) 3-9
BMASTERCHARS 5-6,6-15
BNONXMTCHARS 5-6,6-15
BORDER key 2-23
BPACKING 5-6, 6-16
Break key 2-13
break time 2-14, 5-3, 6-16
BREAKTIME 2-14,5-3,6-16
BTIMEOUT 5-6, 6-17
buttons (see controls)
bypass cancel character 5-4, 6-17
Bypass mode 6-17
BYPASSCANCEL 5-4, 6-17
byte macros 6-31
CANCEL key 2-18
Caps Lock key 2-15
carriage return 2-13
implies line feed 6-23
char parameters 0-2
character colors in dialog area 6-26
character delete character 6-9,6-35
character parameter type (in setup commands) 6-7
CLEAR key 2-18
CMAP6-18
CMODE6-19
CMY color system 6-18
CODE 6-21
color copier
multiplexed 3-24, 6-48
spooling to 3-24
use of 3-22
color copy commands 3-22
color modes 6-20

REV, JAN 1984

\-1

INDEX

color index 6-18
assignment to plotter pen 6-58
default color assignments 6-19
definition of 6-18
for dialog area 6-24, 6-26, 6-28
for graphics surfaces 6-18
how to blink 6-18
color purity, problems with 2-8
color-overlay-mode parameter 6-20
color-specifying-mode parameter 6-20
color-to-gray-Ievel transform 6-20
command files 6-49
command keys 2-14
command line, maximum length of 6-8
command summaries
3PPI (peripheral ports) 3-17
color copy 3-22
disk drive 3-9
escape sequence C-3 to C7
file transfer 3-3
host communications 5-1
setup 6-3
tablet setup 3-26
command terminator 6-8
command word 6-7
abbreviations of 6-7
communications (host) overview 5-1
standard features 5-2
connectors
display unit 2-24
electronics module 2-26, 2-27
KEYBOARD 2-6
pedestal 2-25, 2-27
control characters 2-12
in Snoopy mode 6-64
control keys 2-12
controls
display2-B
electronics module 2-1 to 2-7
pedestal 2-1 to 2-7
CONVERGE button (DEGAUSS/CONVERGE) 2-8
coordinate space 1-2, 2-21
COpy 6-21
copying a file
host-to-plotter copy 3-20
to a printer 3-21
to/from a disk 3-12
to/from a host 3-13, 6-23
vs spooling 3-14
CRLF6-23
crosshair cursor 4-2
Ctrl key 2-12

1-2

cursor
crosshair 4-2
four-button 4-4
GIN 4-2
one-button 4-3
segments used as 4-2
stylus 3-28, 4-3
DA21NDEX 6-24
DABUFFER 6-24
DACHARS 6-25
DAENABLE 6-25
DAINDEX 6-26
DALINES 6-26
DAMODE6-27
DAPOSITION 6-27
DASURFACE 6-28
data bits 6-54 data resolution
for hard copies (see HCDATARES)
internal 1-2, 2-21
DAVIS 6-29
defaults
factory 2-5,6-3
power-up 2-5
reset to factory 2-5, B-5, F-2
DEFINE 6-30, F-10
DEGAUSS/CONVERGE button 2-8
DELETE 3-12,6-32
deleting a file 3-12
delimiters, string 6-8
destination devices 3-2, 6-8
device driver 3-14,6-51
device names 3-2, 6-8
devices
default 6-8
destination 3-2, 6-8
naming conve,ntions 3-2, 6-8
source 3-2, 6-8
dialog area 2-16 to 2-17, 6-24 to 6-29, F-6 to F-9
color map for (see DASURFACE)
enable/disable 6-25
how to modify F-6
visibility control 1-2, 1-4,6-29
width in characters (see DACHARS)
writing mode 6-27
dialog buffer 2-17, 6-24
DIALOG key 2-16
DIRECTORY 3-11,6-32

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

INDEX.

directory
entries on a disk 3-11
examples of 3-11 , 6-33
how to generate 3-11 , 6-32
of a disk 3-11
of a file 3-11
to a disk file 3-11
to a plotter 3-19
to a printer 3-21
disk drive
basic description 3-5
command summary 3-9
indicator 2-7
disks, flexible
backing up 3-7
changing 3-10
inserting and removing 3-6
formatting 3-9
handling and safety 3-6
life expectancy 3-6
write-protecting 3-7
disks, hard 3-7
disks, information on format 3-9
blocks 3-9
directory entries 3-9
sectors 3-9
tracks 3-9
disks, rigid 3-7
DISMOUNT 3-10,6-34
display module 1-2, 2-8, 2-24
documentation, list of 1-1
DUPLEX 6-34
duplex modes 5-6, 6-34
ECHO 6-35
EDITCHARS 6-35, F-6
electronics module 2-26, 2-27
end-of-file string 3-2, 5-3, 6-36
end-of-line string 5-3, 6-37
with directory to plotter 3-19
with printer 3-21
end-of-message characters 5-4, 6-37
in GIN reports 6-62
EOFSTRING 5-3, 6-36
EOLSTRING 5-3, 6-37
EOMCHARS 5-4, 6-37
error codes A-1 to A-30
ANSIA-29
TEKA-6
ERRORLEVEL 6-38
error queue 6-38

41158 OPERATORS

errors
3PPI hardware errors A-4
ANSI A-29
disk hardware errors A-3
disk system context A-4
DMA transfer A-5
during power-up sequence 8-1
fatal 8-2
hardware errors A-3
in Setup commmands 6-9
reporting of 1-5, 8-1
severity levels A-1
TEKA-6
Esc key 2-13
escape sequence commands 6-2, C-1
in Local mode C-2
in Setup mode C-1
summary of C-3
expand a macro 6-30
extension, file 3-2, 6-9
external clocking (see 8AUDRATE)
factory defaults 2-5,6-3
reset to 8-5, F-2
fatal errors 8-2
featu res of terminal 1-2
file 3-2
file devices 3-3, 6-8
file extensions 3-2, 6-9
file header 3-2
file names 3-2, 6-9
file transfers 3-2
command summary 3-3
filtering, graphics input 6-69
FIXUP 6-38
FLAGGING 5-2, 6-39
purpose of 5-2,6-39
flexible disks (see disks, flexible)
FORMAT 3-9, 6-39
formatting a disk 3-9
examples of 3-10
four-button cursor 4-4
framing box 2-21, F-13, F-14
framing mode 2-21
full duplex mode 5-6, 6-34
function keys 2-19
identifiers for DEFINE commands 6-30
GAMODE6-40
GIN devices 4-1

REV, JAN 1984

1-3

INDEX

GIN mode 4-1
examples of use F-22
how to disable 6-41
how to enable 6-42
overview 4-1
using a plotter 4-4
using a tablet 4-3
GINAREA 6-40
GINCURSOR 6-41
GINDISABLE 6-41
GINENABLE 6-42
GINGRIDDING 6-42
GININKING 6-43
G INPICKAPERTURE 6-43
GINRUBBERBAND 6-44
GINSTARTPOINT 6-44
GINWINDOW 6-45
graphics area 1-3
graphics area writing mode 6-40
graphics input
cursor 6-41
examples of F-22
Graphics Input mode (see GIN mode)
graphics segment 1-3
graphics surface 1-3, 6-18
graphics tablet
active writing area 4-3,6-70
attaching the tablet 3-26
cleaning the tablet 3-28
command summary 3-26
cursors 4-3
restoring the bias 3-29
setup commands for the tablet 3-26
use in GIN mode 4-3
gray level 6-18
mapping from colors to gray scale 6-18
gray mode, how to specify 6-20
gridding (in GIN mode) 4-2, 6-42
half duplex mode(s) 5-6, 6-34
half duplex with Supervisor mode 5-6, 6-34
HARD COpy key 2-18, 3-22, 3-24
hard copy image orientation 6-47
hard copy interface 3-22, 6-46
hard copy
background parameter (see COpy)
color 3-22
how to make 3-22, 3-24, 6-22, 6-45
monochrome copies 3-24
monochrome copies via color interface 3-22
reverse video 3-24, 6-22

1-4

hard copy unit (monochrome) 1-6, 3-24
HCCOPIES 3-20, 6-45
HCDATARES 3-20, 6-46
HCINTERFACE 3-20, 6-46
HCORIENT 3-20, 6-47
HCRESERVE 6-48
header characters (for tablet) 6-69
HLS color system 6-18
host communications
command summary 5-1
overview 5-1
host-to-plotter copy 3-20
IGNOREDEL 6-49
indicator lights, keyboard 2-9
initializing the terminal F-2
inking 4-1,6-43, F-22
input queue 5-3, 6-60
int parameters D-3
int-report parameters D-4
integer parameter type 6-7
INTENSITY control 2-8
interrupting host with Break key 2-13, 5-3
key execute delimiter 6-30, 6-49
key specifiers 6-7
for DEFINE 6-30
keyboard 2-9
optional keyboards E-1 to E-6
KEYBOARD connector 2-27,2-28
KEYEXCHAR 6-49
keywords 6-8
KYBD LOCK indicator light 2-9,2-10
LFCR6-50
line continue characters (Block mode) 5-5,6-12
line delete character 6-9, 6-35
Line Feed key 2-12
line feed implies carriage return 6-50
literal character 6-7, 6-35
examples of use 6-31, F-10
LOAD 3-14,6-50
with disk files 3-14
local echo 6-35
local graphics, examples of F-11
LOCAL key 2-1 8
Local mode 2-18
local programmability 3-10,6-39,6-51
locate function 4-1
locked keyboard 2-10, 6-51
LOCKKEYBOARD 6-51
LPOS 6-51

REV, JAN 1984

41158 OPERATORS

INDEX

machine RGB color system 6-18
macro 2-19, 6-30
macro-identifier 6-30
manual overview 1-1
Mass Storage Interface 3-7
master characters (block mode) 5-6, 6-15
MASTER RESET button 2-5, B-2, B-3
maximum line length
for commands 6-8
in Block mode 6-14
"Memory" notation 6-10
multiplexer, color copier 3-24, 6-48
NEXT VIEW key 2-22
non-transmittable characters (Block mode) 5-6,6-15
NORMAL key 2-22
3Normal (Half Duplex) mode 6-34
one-button cursor 4-3
Opaque color mode 6-20
op-code 6-2, C-1
option list for terminal 1-5
Overstrike mode
in dialog area 6-27
in graphics area 6-40
OVERVIEW key 2-22
packing values (Block mode) 5-6, 6-16
page full condition 2-8, 6-52
PAGE FUll indicator light 2-10
Page key 2-14
PAGEFUll6-52
PAN key 2-21
parameter types
in Setup commands 6-7
parameters (for escape sequences)
char 0-2
int 0-3
int-report 0-4
xy 0-5
xy-report 0-6
parameters (for Setup commands)
defaults if omitted (see command descriptions)
factory defaults 6-3
how to specify omitted parameters 6-10
types of 6-7
PARITY 5-2, 6-52
parity 5-2, 6-52
parity checking 6-52
PASSIGN 3-15, 3-17, 6-53
PBAUO 3-17,6-54
PBITS 3-17,6-54

41158 OPERATORS

PCOpy 3-17, 6-55
pedestal 2-25, 2-27
PEOF 3-17,6-56
PEOl 3-17, 6-56
peripheral port (see port)
PFLAG 3-17, 6-57
pick function 4-1
PLOT 3-17, 3-19, 6-57
plotter
4662 settings 3-17, 3-18
4663 setti ngs 3-18
device driver settings (see PASSIGN)
directory to 3-19
host-to-plotter copy 3-20
port settings 3-18, 3-20
set-up information 3-18
use in GIN mode 4-4
use of PLOT command 3-19
use of SPOOL command 3-19
plotter pen color assignments 6-58
PMAP 6-58
port commands, summary of 3-17
port flagging 6-57
port-end-of-file string 6-56
port-end-of-line string 6-56
port-to-port copy 6-55
POWER switch 2-1 , F-2
power-up defaults 2-5
power-up sequence 2-4, B-1
errors during B-1
PPARITY 3-17,6-58
PPORT device driver 3-15
precision grid 3-28
printer
4641 settings 3-21
4643 settings 3-20
directory to 3-21
end-of-line string 3-21
port settings 3-20
set-up information 3-20
spooling to 3-21
printing characters 2-11
programming a key, examples of F-10
Prompt mode 5-4, 6-59
prompt string 5-4, 6-59
PROMPTMOOE 5-4, 6-59
PROMPTSTRING 5-4, 6-59
PROTECT 3-11,6-60
protecting a file 3-12, 6-60
QUEUESIZE 5-3,6-60

REV, JAN 1984

1-5

INDEX

RCV indicator light 2-10
real parameter type 6-7
Replace mode
in dialog area 6-27
in graphics area 6-40
related documentation 1-1
remote echo 6-35
REMOTE ON connector 3-7,3-8
RENAME 3-12,6-61
renaming a file 3-12
RENEW 6-61
REOM6-62
reports
end-of-message indicator 6-62
line length in 6-62
signature characters 6-63
reversing a multiplexed color copier 3-24, 6-48
RESET button 2-5, 8-3
RESTORE key 2-22
reverse video hard copy 3-24, 6-22
RG8 color system 6-18
RG8, machine 6-18
RLiNELENGTH 6-62
Rtn key 2-13
RSIGCHARS 6-63
Rub Out key 2-12
rubberbanding 4-1,6-44, F-23
SAVE 3-14, 6-63
examples of F-20, F-21
to a plotter 3-19
with disk files 3-14
sectors, disk 3-9
segment 1-3
used as GIN cursor 4-2
examples of manipulations F-13
Self Test 2-5, 8-2
SELF TEST button 2-5, 2-6, 8-3
SET UP key 2-16, 6~1
Setup mode 2-16, 6-1
interactions with other modes & settings 6-2
setup commands 6-1
correcting errors in 6-9
factory defaults (in Table 6-1) 6-3
parameter types 6-7
summary of 6-3 to 6-6
syntax conventions 6-1 0
setup memory 2-5, 6-2
reset to defaults 8-5, F-2
saved parameters 6-3

1-6

severity levels, error 6-38, A-1
Shift key 2-13
signature characters 6-63
single character parameter type 6-7
SNOOPY 6-64
software support 1-5
source devices 6-8
Space
in Overstrike mode 6-27, 6-40
in Replace mode 6-27, 6-40
SPOOL 3-13,6-65
to a color copier 3-21
to a plotter 3-17
to a printer 3-19
STATUS 6-66, F-5
STATUS COMMUNICATIONS F-6
STATUS EDITCHARS F-5
STOP 6-68
stop bits 5-4, 6-68
for peripheral ports 6-54
STOP81TS 5-4, 6-68
string delimiters 6-8
string parameter type
delimited 6-8
undelimited 6-8
stroke function 4-1,4-2
stylus 3-28, 4-3
submessages in self test 8-4
substitute character 5-6
Subtractive color mode 6-20
supersurface 6-18
Supervisor (Half Duplex) mode 5-6, 6-34
syntax of escape sequence commands
in Local mode C-2
in Setup mode C-1
syntax of Setup commands 6-10

Tab key 2-13
tablet, graphics (see graphics tablet)
tape drive, use of 3-22
T8FILTER 3-26, 6-69
T8HEADERCHARS 3-26, 6-69
T8SIZE 3-26,6-70
T8STATUS 3-26,6-70
TEK mode 6-21
TEK mode errors A-6
Three-Port Peripheral Interface
command summary 3-17
description 3-15

REV,JAN 1984

4115BOPERATORS

INDE}(

thumbwheels 1-4, 2-10
use in Framing mode 2-21, F-13
use in GIN mode 4-2
use in scrolling text 2-17, F-B
time out (Block mode) 5-6,6-17
tracks, disk 3-9
transmit delay 5-3,6-71
transmit limit 5-3,6-72
turnaround time 5-3
Underscore with DAMODE 6-27
user number 3-10,6-71
USERNUMBER 3-10,6-71
vernier action 2-22
view 1-3, 2-20 to 2-22
VIEW key 2-21
viewing keys 1-3, 2-20 to 2-23
examples of use F-13 to F-19
viewport 1-3, 2-21
viewport update 6-61
WRITE PROTECT switches 2-7, 3-7
WRITE PROTECT indicators 2-7, 3-7
write-protecting a disk 3-7
write-protecting a file 3-12, 6-60
XMT indicator light 2-10
XMTDELAY 5-3, 6-71
XMTLlMIT 5-3,6-72
xy parameters 0-5
xy-report parameters 0-6
ZOOM key 2-21

41158 OPERATORS

REV, JAN 1984

1-7

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date                     : 2018:08:30 17:59:45-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:08:30 18:12:32-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:08:30 18:12:32-07:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:3389a1f8-8561-6c44-88c6-5318e0c5158d
Instance ID                     : uuid:48e15d82-f265-884c-8db9-56555c5c58b5
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 261

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

070 4665 01_4115B_Operators_Manual_Apr1984 01 4115B Operators Manual Apr1984

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation